.

"

t
 The 1996 Chevrolet C/K Pickup Owner’s Manual

Seats and Restraint Systems ............................................................. 1-1

This section tells you how to use your seats and safety belts properly. It also explains the “SIR” system.
FeaturesandControls .................................................................. 2-1
This section explains how to start and operate your vehicle.
Comfort Controls and Audio Systems ..................................................... 3-1
This section tells you how to adjust the ventilation and comfort controls and how to operate your
audio system.
YourDrivingandtheRoad .............................................................. 4- 1
Here you’ll find helpful information and tips aboutthe road and how to drive under different conditions.
ProblemsontheRoad .................................................................. 5-1
This section tells you what todo if you have a problem while driving, such as a flat tireor overheated
engine, etc.
ServiceandAppearanceCare ............................................................ 6-1
Here the manual tellsyou how to keep your vehicle running properly and looking good.
Maintenanceschedule.. ................................................................ 7-1
This section tells you whento perform vehicle maintenance and what fluids and lubricantsto use.
CustomerAssistanceInformation ........................................................ 8-1
This section tells you how to contact Chevrolet for assistance andhow to get service and owner
publications. It also gives you information on “Reporting Safety Defects” on page 8-8.
Index ................................................................................ 9-1
Here’s an alphabetical listing of almost every subject in this manual. You can use it to quickly find
something you want to read.

i
 We support voluntary
technician certification.

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, WE SUPPORT

VOLUNTARY TECHNICIAN
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem and the CERTIFICATION THROUGH
of General
name CWPICKUP are registered trademarks National Institute for
Motors Corporation. AUTOMOTIVE
SERVICE
EXCELLENCE
This manual includes the latest informationat the time it
was printed. We reserve the right to make changesin the
product after that time without further notice. For
vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name For Canadian Owners Who Prefer a
“General Motors of Canada Limited” for Chevrolet
Division whenever it appears in this manual. French Language Manual:
Please keep this manualin your vehicle, so it will be Aux propri6taires canadiens: Vous pouvez vous
there if you ever needit when you’re on the road.If you procurer un exemplaire de ce guide en
fraqais chez
sell the vehicle, please leave this manualin it so the new votre concessionaire ou au:
owner can useit. DGN Marketing Services Ltd.
1500 Bonhill Rd.
Mississauga, Ontario L5T IC7

Litho in U.S.A. @Copyright General Motors Corporation

1995
C9604 B First Edition All Rights Reserved

ii
How to Use this Manual Safety Warnings and ‘Symbols
Many people read theirowner’s manual from beginning You will find a number of safety cautionsin this book.
to end when they first receive their new vehicle. If you We use a box and the wordCAUTION to tell you
do this, itwill help you learn about the features and about things that could hurtyou if you were to ignore
controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll find the warning.
that pictures andwords work together to explain
things quickly.
Index A CAUTION:
A good place to look for what you need is the Index These mean thereis something that could hurt
in the back of the manual. It’s an alphabeticallist of you or other people.
all that’s in the manual, and the page number where
you’ll find it.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard
is. Then
we tell you what to doto help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, you or
others could behurt.

iii
 -c__ ~. ~

You will also finda circle In the notice area, we tell you about something that can
with a slash through it in damage your vehicle. Many times, this damage would
this book. This safety not be covered by your warranty, and it could be costly.
symbol means “Don’t,” But the notice will tell you what to do to help avoid
“Don’t dothis,” or “Don’t the damage.
let this happen.” When you read other manuals,you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warningsin different colors or
in different words.
You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Also, in this book you will find these notices:

NOTICE:
These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.

iv
Vehicle Symbols
These are some of the symbols you may find on your vehicle.

For example, These symbols These symbols These symbols These symbols Here are some
these symbols are important have to do with are on some of are used on other symbols
are used on an for you and your lights: your controls: warning and you may see:
original battery: your passengers indicator lights:
whenever your

A
WINDSHIELD
vehicle is
CAUTION
POSSIBLE
INJURY
driven: WIPER

COOLANT
TEMP
-- FUSE -%-

PROTECT
EYES BY
SHIELDING Q UNLOCK lzjl TURN
SIGNALS e BATTERY
CHARGING
SYSTEM
LIGHTER n
CAUSTIC
BATTERY
ACID COULD
FASTEN
SEAT
WINDSHIELD
DEFROSTER BRAKE (a) HORN b
CAUSE BELTS
BURNS

AVOID
SPARKS OR
DAYTIME * rn
0
WINDOW
DEFOGGER
COOLANT
a SPEAKER
b
FLAMES
RUNNING a

LAMPS . * '
ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE
e, p3 FUEL
SPARK
OR ,111,
FLAME
COULD
EXPLODE
BATTERY
FOG LAMPS $0 VENTILATING
FAN ANTI-LOCK
BRAKES
(@)

V
Model Reference
This manual covers these models: Crew Cab
Regular Cab Pickup

Chassis Cab

I
Extended Cab Pickup

1- 3500 HD Chassis Cab

vi
c
 Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

Here
you’ll
information
find about the seats in your If your
vehicle has a manual
vehicle
your
safety
use
belts
how
properly.
to
and You bucket,
split
bench
or full
can
also
learn
about
some
things
you
should not do with bench
seat,
you
can
adjust it
bags, air with thisfront at the
lever
of the seat.
Seats and Seat Controls
-- how to adjust
This section tells you about the seats L Y
them, and fold them up and down. It also tells you about
reclining front seatbacks and head restraints.
Manual Front Seat

IA CAUTION: Slide the leverat the front of the seat toward the
passenger’s side to unlockit. Using your body, slide the
You can lose controlof the vehicle if you tryto seat to where you wantit. Then, release the lever and try
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicleis to move the seatwith your body in order to make sure
moving. The sudden movement could startle and the seat is lockedin place.
1 confuse you, or make you pusha pedal when you
don’t want to. Adjust thedriver’s seat only when
the vehicle isnot moving.

1-1
Power Driver’s Seat (Option) Power Lumbar Control
If you have power lumbar
adjustment, you can
increase or decrease
lumbar support in an area
of the lower seatback.

If your vehicle has a power seat on the driver’s side, you can
adjust it with these controls at the outside edge of the seat.
To increase support, press and hold the front of the
You can use the round center knob to move the seat
rocker switch. Let go of the switch when the lower
where you want it. To raise the seat, move the knob up.
To lower the seat, move the knob down. To move the seatback reaches the desired level of support.
seat forward, move the knob toward the front of the To decrease support, press and hold the rear of the
vehicle. To move the seat rearward, move the knob rocker switch. Let go of the switch when the lower
toward the rear of the vehicle. seatback reaches the desired level of support.
You can also raise and lower the front and rear of the
seat. To raise the front of the seat, move the front
lever up. To lower the front of the seat, move the front
lever down. To raise the rear of the seat, move the rear
lever up. To lower the rear of the seat, move the rear
lever down.
1-2
Reclining Seatbacks To adjust a seatbackwith
this lever, lift the front of
Your vehicle will have one of these reclining the lever.
seatback controls.
Release the lever to lock the
seatback where you want it.
Pull up on the front of the
lever and the seatback will
go to an upright position.

To adjust a seatback with this lever, move the lever

rearward. Release the lever to lock the seatback where
you want it. Move the lever again rearward and the
seatback will go to an upright position.

1-3
 Sitting in a reclined position whenyour vehicle is
in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle
up, your safety belts can’t do their job when
you’re reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can’t do its job because it
won’t be against your body. Instead, it will be
in front of you. In a crash you could go into it,
receiving neckor other injuries.
The lap belt can’t do its job either. In a crash the
belt could goup over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal injuries.
But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle For properprotection when the vehicle isin
is moving. motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety
belt properly.

I 1-4
Head Restraints To fold a seatback forward
on all seats exceptthe base
Slide the head restraint up or down so that the top of the level bench seat, pull this
restraint is closest to the top of your ears. Thisposition lever forward and fold the
reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash. seatback forward.
Seatback Latches
The front seatbackof the base level bench seat folds
forward to let you access the rearof the cab. Your
seatback will move back and forth freely, wless you
come to a sudden stop. Then it will lock in place. If you
have a Crew Cab, your front seatback is designed not to
fold forward. Access to the rear of the cab is available
by using the rear doors. To return the seatback to the upright position, justpush
The front seatbackof all seats exceptthe base level the seatback rearward until it latches. After returning the
bench seat foldsforward to let you access the rear of the seatback to its upright position, pull the seatback
cab. If you have a Crew Cab, your front seatback is forward to make sure it is locked.
designed not to fold forward. Access to the rear of the The rear seatback of a rear bench seat without a center
cab is available by using the rear doors. armrest can be folded forward to let you reach the
area behind it. Your seatback will move back and forth
freely, unless you come to a sudden stop. Then, it will
lock into place.
The Crew Cab rear seatback with a centerarmrest folds
forward to let you access the area behind it.

1-5
 To fold a seatback forward, Easy Entry Seat (Extended Cab Only)
1 pull this lever forward and
fold the seatback forward. The driver and passenger front bucket seat and the 60140
split bench seat of your vehicle has an easy entry feature.
This makes it easy to get in and out of the rear seat.
To operate the seat, pull
forward on the top of this
lever and tilt the back
forward toward the front of
the vehicle.

To return the seatback to the upright position, just push

the seatback rearward until it latches. After returning the
seatback to its upright position, pull the seatback
forward to make sure it is locked.

When you do, the seat bottom will release. Just pull or
CA 'JTION: push the seat forward until it stops.
rIf the seatback isn't locl I, it could move forward
To return the seat to its regular position, return the
seatback to its upright position, then push the whole seat
in a sudden stopor crash. That could cause injury rearward until it latches.
to the person sitting there. Always press rearward
on the seatback tobe sure it is locked.

1-6
After returning the seat to its regular position, try to Rear Seat (ExtendedCab)
move the seat with your body in order to make sure the
seat is locked into place. Folding the Rear Seat
The extended cab may have a rear folding seat
which can be folded open for more seating space. To
CAUTION: use the seat:
;
1
- - I . Pull the entire seat forward until it is flat.
If any easy entry seatisn’t locked, it canmove. In
a sudden stopor crash, the person sitting there 2. Then pull forward on the
could be injured. And, even if there is no crash or RELEASE lever under
sudden stop, adriver sitting in an unlocked easy the seat cushion, on the
entry seatcould be startledby the sudden passenger’s side of the
movement and hit thewrong control or pedal, rear seat. Push the
seatback rearward until
causing an accident. After you’ve used it, be sure
it latches.
to push rearward on anyeasy entry seat tobe
sure it is locked.

3. After pushing the seatback upright into position, pull

the seatback forward to make sure it is locked.

1-7
The extended cab’s rear seat can also be folded up to Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone
provide more cargo space. To fold the seat:
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts
1. Pull forward on the RELEASE lever at the side of properly. It also tells you some things you should not do
the seat cushion, behind the passenger’s side front with safety belts.
seat. Fold the seatback forward until it latches with
the seat cushion. And it explains the Supplemental Inflatable Restraint
(SIR), or air bag system.
2. Lift the entire seat
and push it rearward
- m - -
into place. A CAUTION:
Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’t wear
a safety belt properly. If you are in a crash and
you’re not wearing a safety belt, your injuries
can be much worse. You can hit things inside the
vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously
injured or killed. In the same crash, you might
not be if you are buckled up. Always fasten your
3. Make sure the seat is secure. safety belt, and check that your passengers’ belts
are fastened properly too.
Rear Seat (Crew Cab)
You can adjust the seat by sliding the lever at the front
of the seat toward the seat support to unlock it. Then,
slide the seat to where you want it. Release the lever and
try to move the seat with your body in order to make
sure the seat is locked into place.
1-8
 Your vehicle has a light Why Safety Belts Work
that comes on as a reminder
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast
to buckle up. (See“Safety
as it goes.
Belt Reminder Light” in
the Index.)

In most states and Canadian provinces, the law says to

wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work..
You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have a
crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.
A few crashes aremild, and some crashes can be
so serious that even buckled up a person wouldn’t
survive. But most crashes’are in between. Inmany of
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without belts they could have been badly
hurt or killed. Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s justa seat
After more than 25 years of safety belts in vehicles, on wheels.
the facts areclear. In most crashes bucklingup does
matter ... a lot!
 . ..

Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
doesn't stop.

1-10
The person keeps going until stopped by something. or the instrument panel ...
In a real vehicle, it couldbe the windshield ...

1-11
 Here Are Questions Many People Ask
About Safety Belts -- and the Answers
Q; Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident if I’m wearinga safety belt?
A: You could be -- whether you’re wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you’re upside down. And your chance of
being conscious during and after an accident, so
you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if
you are belted.
If my vehicle hasair bags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in
most of them in the future. But they are
or the safety belts!
supplemental systems only; so they work with
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does. safety belts -- not instead of them. Every air bag
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance, system ever offered for salehas required the use of
and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that has air
safety belts make such good sense.
bags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.

1-12
@ If I’m a good driver, and I never drivefar from First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your
home, why should I wear safety belts? vehicle has.
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an We’ll start with the driver position.
accident -- even one that isn’t your fault -- you and Driver Position
your passengers can be hurt. Being a good driver
doesn’t protect you from things beyond your This part describes the driver’s restraint system.
control, such as bad drivers. Lap-Shoulder Belt
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of The driver has a lap-shoulder belt.Here’s how to wear it
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries properly.
and deaths occurat speeds of less than 40 mph
1. Close and lock the door.
(65 km/h).
2. Adjust the seat (to see how, see “Seats” in the Index)
Safety belts are for everyone.
so you can sit up straight.
How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly
Adults
This part is only for peopleof adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts andchildren. And there are different rules for
smaller children and babies.If a child will be riding in
your vehicle, see the partof this manual called
“Children.” Follow thoserules for everyone’s protection.

1-13
 I
I

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on
Don’t let it get twisted. the hips,just touching the thighs.In a crash, this applies
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’dbe less likely
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. to slide under the lap belt.If you slid under it, the belt
would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
I f the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo
Extender” at the end of this section. over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned body are best able to take belt restrainingforces.
so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or a crash.
if you ever had to.
1-14
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster To move it down, push in at the word PRESS and move
the height adjuster to the desired position. You can move
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt
the adjuster up just by pushing up on the shoulder belt
adjuster to the height that is right for you.
guide. After you move the adjuster to where you want it,
try to move it down without pushing in to make sure it
has locked into position.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the
belt is centered on your shoulder. The belt should be
away from your face and neck, but not falling off
your shoulder.

1-15
@ What’s wrong with this?

is
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt shouldfit against yourbody.

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearly

as much protection this way.

1-16
Q."What's wrong with this?'

I
You can be seriouslyinjured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this.In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen.The belt
forces would bethere, not at the pelvic bones.,This
could cause seriousinternal injuries. Always
buckle your belt into,
the buckle nearest you.

A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

1-17
@ What's wrong with this?
A CAUTION: I
You can be seriously injuredif your belt goes'
over an armrest like this. The belt would be much
too high. Ina crash, you can slide under the belt.
The belt force would then be applied at the
abdomen, not at the pelvic bones, and that could
cause serious or fatal injuries.
Be sure thebelt
goes under the armrests.

A: The belt is over an armrest.

1-18
12.' What's wrong with this?

You can be seriously injuredif you wear the

shoulder belt under your arm. aIncrash, your
body would move too far forward, whichwould
increase the chanceof head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to the
ribs, which aren't as strongas shoulder bones.
You could also severely injure internal organs
like your liveror spleen.

A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should

be worn over the shoulderat all times.

1-19
 What’s wrong with this?

You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.In

a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of the
belt to spread impact forces.If a belt is twisted,
make it straight so it can work properly, or ask
your dealer to fix it.

A: The belt is twisted across the body.

1-20
 Supplemental 'Inflatable Restraint
(SIR) System . I .
',i ?!

This part explains the Supplemental Inflatable Restraint

[SIR) system or air bag system.
..
Your vehicle may have '

an air bag for the driver.

If it does, it will say
Supplemental Inflatable
Restraint on the middle part
of.the steering wheel.

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.

The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is outof the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both the
belt and your vehicle.

1-21
Here are the most important things to know about the
air bag system:

Air bags inflate with great force, faster than the

blink of an eye. If you’re too close to an inflating
air bag, it could seriously injure you. Safety belts
You can be severely injured or killed in a cr; L if
--
you aren’t wearing your safety belt even if you
help keepyou in position for an air bag inflation
in a crash. Always wear your safetybelt, even
have an airbag. Wearing your safety belt during a
with an airbag, and sit as far back asyou can
crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things
while still maintaining control of your vehicle.
inside the vehicle or being ejected fromit. The air
bag is only a “supplemental restraint.” Thatis, it
works with safety beltsbut doesn’t replacethem. There is an air bag
Air bags aredesigned to workonly in moderate to readiness light on the
severe crashes where the front of your vehicle hits instrument panel, which
something. They aren’t designed to inflate at all in shows AIR BAG.
rollover, rear, sideor low-speed frontal crashes.
AIR
Everyone in your vehicle, including the driver, BAG
--
should wear a safety belt properly whether or
not there’s an air bag for that person.

The system checks the air bag’s electrical system for

malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See “Air Bag Readiness Light” in the Index
for more information.
1-22
How the Air Bag System Works
A CAUTION:- -
Don’t put anything on, or attach anything to, the
steering wheel. Also, don’t put anything (suchas
pets or objects) between the driver and the
steering wheel. If something is between an
occupant and an air bag, it could affect the
--
performance of the air bag or worse, it could
cause injury.

When should an air bag inflate?

The air bag is designed to inflate in moderate to severe
frontal or near-frontal crashes. The air bag will inflate
only if the impact speed is above the system’s designed
“threshold level.” If your vehicle goes straight into a
wall that doesn’t move or deform, the threshold level is
Where is the air bag? about 9 to 16 mph (14 to 26 km/h). The threshold level
The driver’s air bag is in the middle of the can vary, however, with specific vehicle design, so that
steering wheel. it can be somewhat above or below this range. If your
vehicle strikes something that will move or deform, such
as a parked car, the threshold level will be higher. The
air bag is not designed to inflate in rollovers, side
impacts or rear impacts, because inflation would not
help the occupant.
1-23
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air How does an air bag restrain?
bag should have inflated simply because of the damage In moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions,
to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were. even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel.
Inflation is determined by the angle of the impact and The air bag supplements the protection provided by
the vehicle’s deceleration. Vehicle damage is only one safety belts. Air bags distribute the force of the impact
indication of this. more evenly over the occupant’s upper body, stopping
The air bag system is designed to work properly under a the occupant more gradually. But air bags would not
wide range of conditions, including off-road usage. help you in many types of collisions, including
Observe safe driving speeds, especiallyon rough terrain. rollovers, rear impacts and side impacts, primarily
As always, wear your safety belt. See “Off-Road because an occupant’s motion is not toward the air bag.
Driving” in the Index for more tips on off-road driving. Air bags should never be regarded as anything more
than a supplement to safety belts, and then only in
What makes anair bag inflate?
moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions.
In a frontal or near-frontal impact of sufficient severity,
What will you see after an air bag inflates?
the air bag sensing system detects that the vehicle is
suddenly stopping as a result of a crash. The sensing After the air bag inflates, it quickly deflates. This occurs
system triggers a chemical reaction of the sodium azide so quickly that some people may not even realize the air
sealed in the inflator. The reaction produces nitrogen bag inflated. Some components of the air bag module in
gas, which inflates the air bag. The inflator, air bag and the steering wheel hub will be hot for a short time. The
related hardware are all part of the air bag module part of the bag that comes into contact with you may be
packed inside the steering wheel. warm, but it will never be too hot to touch. There will be
some smoke and dust coming from vents in the deflated
air bag. Air bag inflation will not prevent the driver
from seeing orfrom being able to steer the vehicle, nor
will it stop people from leaving the vehicle.

1-24
 0 Your vehicle is equipped with a diagnosticmodule,
which records information about the air bag system.
The module records information about the readiness
I of the system, when the sensors areactivated and
When an air bag inflates, there is dust in the air. driver’s safety belt usage at deployment.
This dust could cause breathing problems for
0 Let only qualified technicianswork on your air
people witha history of asthma or other
bag system. Improper service can mean that your
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the air bag system won’t work properly. See your dealer
vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so. for service.
If you have breathing problems but can’t get out
of the vehicle after an air baginflates, then get
fresh airby opening a window or door. NOTICE:
If you damage the cover for the driver’s air bag,
0 The air bag is designed to inflate only once. After it
it may not work properly.You may have to
inflates, you’ll need some new parts for your air bag
system. If you don’t get them, the air bag system replace the air bag module. Do not open or break
won’t be there to help protect you in another crash. the air bagcover.
A new system will include the air bag module and
possibly other parts. The service manual for your
vehicle coversthe need to replace otherparts.

1-25
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle Adding Equipment to Your Air
The air bag affects how your vehicle should be serviced. Bag-Equipped Vehicle
There are parts of the air bag system in several places
around your vehicle. You don’t want the system to Q= front
If I add a push bumper or a bicycle rack to the
of my vehicle, will it keep theair bag from
inflate while someone is working on your vehicle. Your
GM dealer and the service manual have information working properly?
about servicing your vehicle and the air bag system. To A: As long as the push bumper or bicycle rack is
purchase a service manual, see “Serviceand Owner attached to your vehicle so that the vehicle’s basic
Publications” in the Index. structure isn’t changed, it’s not likely to keep the
air bags from working properly in a crash.

e= What if I add a snow plow? Will it keep theair

bag from working properly?
For up to two minutes after the ignition key is A: We’ve designed our air bag systems to work
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an air properly under a wide range of conditions,
bag can still inflate during improper service. You including snow plowing with vehicles equipped
can be injuredif you are close to an air bag when with the optional Snow Plow Prep Package
it inflates. Avoid wires wrapped withyellow tape, (RPO VYU). But don’t change or defeat the
or yellow connectors. Theyare probably partof snow plow’s “tripping mechanism.’’ If youdo,
the air bag system. Be sure tofollow proper it can damage your snow plow and your vehicle,
service procedures, and make sure the person and it may cause an air bag inflation.
performing work foryou is qualified to do so.

The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.

1-26
 Is there anything I might add to the frontof the
vehicle that could keep the air bag from
working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, frontend sheet metal or
height, they may keep the air bag system from
working properly. Also, the air bag system may
not work properly if you relocate any of the air bag
sensors. If you have any question about this, you
should contact Customer Assistance before you
modify your vehicle. (The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two
of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this
manual. See “Customer Satisfaction Procedure” in
the Index.)
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,below
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts. The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more
likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.

1-27
Right Front Passenger’Position Lap Belt
The right front passenger’s safety.belt works thesame If your vehicle has front and rear bench seats, someone
way as the driver’s safety belt. See “Driver Position” camit in the center positions.
earlier in this section.
When the lapbelt is pulled out all the way, it willlock.
If it does, let it go back .allthe way and start again.
Center PassengerPosition
I

Rear (Extended and Crew Cab)

1-28
Front (All) Rear (Extended and Crew Cab)

When you sit in a center seatingposition, you have a lap

safety belt, which has no retractor. To make the belt
longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it alongthe belt.

1-29
 Rear Seat Passengers
It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up!
Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear
seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are
wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be thrown
out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others
in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions
(Extended Cab)

Front (All)
To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown until
the belt is snug.
Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap
part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt isn’t long enough,
see “Safety Belt Extender” at the end of this section.

1-30
Lap-Shoulder Belt (ExtendedCab)
The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder
belts. Here’s how to wear one properly.

If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, tilt the latch
plate and keep pulling until you can buckle it.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. If the belt is not long enough, see “Safety Belt
Don’t let it get twisted. Extender’’ at theend of this section.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned
so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if you ever had to.

1-31
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part. the hips, just touching the thighs.In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely
to slide under the lap belt.If you slid under it, the belt
would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the
body are best able to take belt restrainingforces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop ora crash.

1-32
 Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions
(Crew Cab)

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is

too loose. Ina crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt should fit against your body.

If you have an Extended Cab, see “Rear Seat

Outside Passenger Positions (Extended Cab)”
earlier in this section.

To unlatch the belt, justpush the button on the buckle.

1-33
Lap-Shoulder Belt (Crew Cab) 1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder
belts. Here’s how to wear one properly. 2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Pull
up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. When
the lap belt is pulled out all the way, it will lock. If it
does, let it go back all the way and start again.
If the belt is not long enough, see “Safety Belt
Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

1-34
 You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
. shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely
to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt
would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the
body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks only if there’s a sudden stop or
a crash. To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
1-35
Children Smaller Childrenand Babies
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! That includes -
infants and all children smaller than adult size. In fact;
the law in every state in the United States and in every
Canadian province says children up to some age must be
restrained while in a vehicle. Smaller children and babies should always be
restrained in a child or infant restraint. The
instructions for the restraintwill say whether it is
the right type andsize for yourchild. A very
young child’s hip bones areso small thata
regular belt might not stay low on the hips, as it
should. Instead, the beltwill likely be over the
child’s abdomen. In a crash, the beltwould apply
force right on the child’s abdomen, which could
cause seriousor fatalinjuries. So, be sure that
any child small enough for one is always properly
restrained in a childor infant restraint.
I

1-36
 at only 25 mph (40 kmh), a 12-1b. (5.5 kg) baby
will suddenly become a 240-lb. (110 kg) force on
your arms. Thebaby would be almost impossible
to hold.
Secure thebaby in an infant restraint.

I
Never hold a baby in your arms while riding in a
--
vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh much until a
crash. During a crash baby
a will become so
heavy you can’t hold it.For example, in a crash
CAUTION: (Continued)

1-37
Child Restraints Where to Put the Restraint
Be sure the child restraint is designed to be used in a (Extended Cab and Crew Cab)
vehicle. If it is, it will have a label saying that it meets Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We at
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may General Motors therefore recommend that you put your
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a child restraint in the rear seat unless the child is an
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system in infant and you’re the only adult in the vehicle. In that
your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured within case, you might want to secure the restraint in the front
the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal injury. seat where you can keep an eye on the baby.
The instructions that come with the infant or child Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child
restraint will show you how to do that. restraint properly.
Where to Put the Restraint Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
(Except Extended Cab and Crew Cab) people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any
The child restraint must be secured properly in the child restraint in your vehicle -- even when no child
center orright front passenger seat. is in it.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any
child restraint in your vehicle -- even when no child
is in it.

1-38
Top Strap Securing a Child Restraint ina Rear
Outside Seat Position (Extended Cab)

If you have a Crew Cab, see “Securing a Child Restraint

in a Rear Outside Seat Position (Crew Cab)” later in
this section.
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part
If your child restraint has a top strap, it should be about the top strap if the child restraint has one.
anchored. If you need to have an anchor installed, you 1. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions
can ask your GM dealer to put it in for you. If you want for the child restraint.
to install an anchor yourself, your dealer can tell you
how to doit. 2. Secure the child in the child restraint as the
instructions say.

1-39
 1
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is

positioned so you would be able tounbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed. If the

shoulder belt goes in frontof the child’s face orneck,’
put it behind the child restraint.

1-40
A
 6 . Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint,just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let itgo back all the way. The safety belt
will move freely again and be readyto work for an adult
or larger child passenger.
Securing aChild Restraint ina Rear
Outside Seat Position (Crew Cab)

5. To tighten the belt,pull up on the shoulder belt while

you push down on the child restraint.
I
Make sure thebuckle end of the belt is pulled out all
the way.
If you have an Extended Cab, see “Securing a Child
Restraint in a Rear Outside SeatPosition (Extended
Cab)” earlierin this section.

1-41
/
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part
about the top strap if the child restraint has one.
1. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions
for the child restraint.
2. Secure the child in the child restraint as the
instructions say.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or around
the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show
you how. If the shoulder belt goes in front of the
child’s face or neck, put it behind the child restraint.

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is

positioned so you would be able tounbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

1-42
5. Pull the rest of the lap belt all the way out of the 6. To tighten the belt, feed the lap belt back into the
retractor to set the lock. retractor while you push down on the child restraint.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult
or larger child passenger.

1-43
 Securing a Child Restraint. ina Center
Seat Position

i You'llbeusingthe lap belt.

I
; See the earlier part about the top strap if the child
i restraint has one. Front (All)
i
 4. Run the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the
restraint. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.

Rear (Extended and Crew Cab)

1. Make the belt as long as possibleby tilting the latch
plate and pulling it along the belt.
Rear (Extended and Crew Cab)
2. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions
for thechild restraint.
3. Secure the child in the child restraint as the
instructions say.

1-45
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlierpart
about the top strapif the child restrainthas one.
1. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions
for the child restraint.
2. Secure the childin the child restraint asthe
instructions say.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
If the shoulder beltgoes in front of the child’s face or
neck, put it behind the child restraint.

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is

positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

1-47
5. Pull the rest of the lap belt all the way out of the 6. To tighten the belt, feed the lap belt back into the
retractor to set the lock. retractor while you push down on the child restraint.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle's
safety belt .and letit go back all the way. The safety,belt
will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult
or larger child passenger.
Larger Children If you have the choice, achild should sit next to a
window so the child can wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide.
Accident statistics show that children are saferif they
are restrained in the rear seat. But they need to use the
safety belts properly.
Children who aren’t buckled up can be thrown out in
a crash.
Children who aren’t buckled up can strike other
people who are.

Children who have outgrown child restraints should

wear the vehicle’s safety belts.

1-49
 A- CAUTidN:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt. The
belt can’t properly spread the impact forces. In a
crash, the two children can be crushed together
and seriously injured. A belt must beused by
only one personat a time.

What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,

but the childis so small that the shoulderbelt is
very closeto the child’s face or neck?
A: Move the child toward the center of the vehicle, but
be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child’s
shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper body
would have the restraint that belts provide. If the
child is so small that the shoulder belt is still very
close to the child’s face or neck, you might want to
place the child in a seat that has a lap belt, if your
vehicle has one.

1-50
 - -
Never do this.
Here achild is sitting in a seatthat has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulderpart is behind
the child. If the child wears the belt in thisway, in
a crash thechild might slide under thebelt. The
belt's force would then be applied righton the
child's abdomen. That could causeserious or
fatal injuries.
I

Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt

should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child's thighs. This applies belt force to the child's
pelvic bones in a crash.

1-51
Safety Belt Extender Checking Your Restraint Systems
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
should use it. and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and
But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, your anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you go loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the anything that might keep a safety belt system from
extender will be long enough for you. The extender will doing its job, have it repaired.
be just for you, and just for theseat in your vehicle that Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
you choose. Don’t let someone else use it, and use it crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is
only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear it, just attach it torn or frayed,get a new one right away.
to the regular safety belt.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)

1
Replacing Restraint System Parts If you ever see a label on the right front passenger’s
safety belt in an Extended Cab model that says to
After a Crash replace the belt, be sure to do so. Then the new belt will
If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts? be there to help protect you in a collision.You would
see this label on the belt near the door opening.
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if worn If belts are cut ordamaged, replace them. Collision
during a more severe crash, then you need new belts. damage also may mean you will need to have safety belt
or seat parts repaired or replaced. New parts and repairs
may be necessary even if the belt wasn’t being used at
the time of the collision.
If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bag
system parts. See the part on the air bag system earlier
in this section.

1-53
NOTES

1-54
 Section 2 Features and Controls

Here you can learn about the many standard and

optional features on your vehicle, and information on
.: I
starting, shifting and braking. Also explained are the
instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you if
everything is working properly -- and what to do if you
have a problem.
Keys

Leaving young children in a vehicle with the

ignition key is dangerous for many reasons.
A child or others could be badly injuredor
even killed.
They could operate power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move. Don't
leave the keys in a vehicle with young children.

2-1
 Your vehicle has one Tailgate
double-sided key for the
ignition and all door locks. You can open the tailgate by lifting up on its handle
while pulling the tailgate toward you.
To shut the tailgate, firmly push it away from you into
the latch.
When you put the tailgate back up, pull it back toward
you, to be sure that it latches securely.

Tailgate Removal
The tailgate on your vehicle can be removed to allow
for different loading situations. Although the tailgate
If you ever lose your keys, your dealer will be able to can be removed without assistance, you may want
assist you with obtaining new ones. someone to assist you with the removal to avoid
possible finish damage.

I NOTICE:
~ Your vehicle has a number of new features that
~ can help prevent theft. But youcan have a lot of
trouble getting into your vehicle if you
ever lock
your key inside.You may even have to damage
your vehicleto get in.So be sureyou have an
extra key.

2-2
To remove the tailgate: Third Door (Option)
1. Raise the tailgate
slightly and release both
retaining cableclips. To
release the cable clips,
lift the cableso it points
straight out and push the
cable clipsforward.
c

I 2. With the tailgate at a

slight upward angle,
pull back on the tailgate
at theright edge and
then move the tailgate Your vehicle may be equipped with a third door that
to the right torelease the allows easieraccess to the rear area of an extended cab.
left edge.
To open the door, first open the passenger side front
door. Then, use the handle located on the front edge of
the rear door.
You must close and latch the third door before you can
Reverse the above procedure tore-install. Make surethe close the front passengerdoor.
tailgate is secure.

2-3
-
Door Locks
1 1
A CAUTION: 111
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
From the outside, use your key or the Keyless Entry
System, if your vehicle has this option.
lock the door from the
ITo
inside, slide the lever on
Unlocked doors can be dangerous. your door down.
-- --
Passengers especially children can easily
open the doors and fall out. When a door is
locked, the inside handle won’t open it.
Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked
door when you slow down or stop your vehicle.
This may not be so obvious: You increase the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle ina
crash if the doors aren’t locked. Wear safety belts
properly, lock your doors, and you will be far
better off whenever you drive your vehicle. To unlock the door, slide the lever up.

2-4
Power Door Locks (Option) Your Keyless Entry System operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Press the bottom of the Commission (FCC) Rules.
power door lock switch,
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
nlarked LOCK, o n either
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
front door to lock all the
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference,
doors at once. Press the
and (2) This device must accept any interference
ribbed side of the switch to
received, including interference that may cause
unlock all the doors at once.
undesired operation.
Should interference to this system occur, try this:
0 Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See the instructions on battery
replacement.
0 Check the distance. You may be too far from your
Leaving Your Vehicle vehicle. This product has a maximum range.
If you are leaving the vehicle, take your keys, open your 0 Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
door and set the locks from inside. Then get out and
be blocking the signal.
close the door.
0 See your GM dealer or a qualified technician
Keyless Entry System (Option) for service.
If your vehicle has this option, you can lock and unlock Changes or modifications to this system by other than an
your doors from up to 30 ,feet (9 m) away using the key authorized service facility could void authorization to
chain transmitter supplied with your vehicle. use this equipment.

2-5
Operation Matching Transmitter(s)To Your Vehicle
To unlock the driver’s door, press the UNLOCK button. Each key chain transmitter is coded to prevent another
If you press this button again within five seconds, all the transmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If a transmitter
doors (except the rear seat access door)will unlock. is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased through
Press the LOCK button to lock all the doors (except the your dealer. Remember to bring any remaining
rear seat access door). transmitters with you when you go to your dealer. When
the dealer matches the replacement transmitter to your
When the UNLOCK button is pressed, the interior dome vehicle, any remaining transmitters must also be
lamps are turned on for 40 seconds or until the ignition matched. Once the new transmitter is coded, the lost
is activated. transmitter will not unlock your vehicle. Each vehicle
When the LOCK button is pressed, the interior lamps can have only t.wo transmitters matched to it.
are turned on for a few seconds if the doors are closed.’ Battery Replacement
If the LOCK button is pressed when a door is open, the
interior lamps will stay on for a few seconds after the Under normal use, the batteries in your key chain
door is closed. transmitter should last about two years.
You can tell the batteries are weak if the transmitter
won’t work at the normal range in any location. If you
have to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter
works, it’s probably time to change the batteries.
Use two Duracell@batteries type DL201 6, or a
similar type.

2-6
To replace the batteries: Theft
Vehicle theft is big business, especiallyin some cities.
Although your vehicle hasa number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal. However, there are ways you can help.
Key in the Ignition
If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside, it’s an
easy target for joy riders or professional thieves -- so
don’t do it.
When you park your vehicle and open the driver’s door,
you’ll hear a tone reminding you to remove your key
from the ignition and take it with you. Always do this.
Your steering wheel will be locked, and so will your
ignition. If you have an automatic transmission, taking
your key out also locksyour transmission. And
1. Insert a dime in the side seam of the transmitter remember to lock the doors.
housing, near the key ring hole.
2. Twist the dime to separate the two halves of the
transmitter housing. Separate the housing, bottom
half first.
3. Remove and replace the batteries. Put the new
batteries in with the printed side down.
4. Align the housing and snap the halves together.

2-7
Parking at Night New Vehicle “Break-In”
Park in a lighted spot, close all windows and lock your
vehicle. Remember to keep your valuables out of sight.
Put them in a storage area, or take them with you. NOTICE:
Parking Lots Your modern vehicle doesn’t need an elaborate
If you park in a lot where someone will be watching “break-in.” But itwill perform betterin the long
your vehicle, it’s best to lock it up and take your keys. run if you follow these guidelines:
But what if you have to leave your ignition key? What if 0 Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or
you have to leave something valuable in your vehicle? less for the first500 miles (804 km).
0 Put your valuables in a storage area, like your --
0 Don’t drive at any one speed fast or

glove box. --
slow for the first500 miles (804 km).
Don’t make full-throttle starts.
0 Lock all the doors except the driver’s.
0 Avoid making hard stops for the first
200 miles (322 km) orso. During this time
your new brake linings aren’tyet broken
in. Hard stopswith new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier replacement.
Follow this breaking-in guideline every
time you get new brake linings.
0 Don’t tow a trailer during break-in.
See “Towing a Trailer’’ in the Index for
more information.

2-8
Ignition Positions LOCK (B): This position locks your ignition, steering
wheel and transmission. It’s a theft-deterrent feature.
You can use your key to turn your ignition switch to five You will only be able to remove your key when the
different positions. ignition is turned to LOCK.
OFF (C): This position lets you turn off the engine but
C still turn the steering wheel. It doesn’t lock the steering
wheel like LOCK. Use OFF if you must have your
vehicle in motion while the engine is off (for example, if
your vehicle is being pushed).
RUN (D): This is the position for driving.
START (E): This position starts your engine.
i

A - i E A CAU [ON:
W On manual transmissionvehicles, turning thekey
to LOCK will lock the steering column and result
in a loss of ability to steer thevehicle. This could
ACCESSORY (A): This position lets you use things cause a collision. If you need to turn theengine
like the radio, power windows and the windshield
wipers when the engine is off. Push in the key and turn off while thevehicle is moving, turn thekey only
it toward you. Your steering wheel will remain locked, to OFF. Don’t press thekey release button while
just as it was before you inserted the key. the vehicle is moving.

2-9
I NOTICE: Key Release Button
The ignition key cannot be
If your key seems stuck inLOCK and you can’t removed from the ignition
turn it, be sure itis all theway in. If it is, then of manual transmission
vehicles unless the key
turn the steering wheel left and rightwhile you release button is used.
turn thekey hard. But turn thekey only with
your hand. Using a tool to force it could break
the key or theignition switch. If none of this
works, then yourvehicle needs service.

To remove the key on manual transmission vehicles,

turn the key to the OFF position, then press the button
and turn the key to the LOCK position. Do not hold the
button in while turning the key to OFF. Keeping your
finger on the button, pull the key straight out.
On automatic transmission vehicles, turn the key to
LOCK and pull it straight out.

2-10
Starting Your Gasoline Engine Manual transmission
If you have a diesel engine, see “StartingYour Diesel The gear selector shouldbe in NEUTRAL (Nj. Hold the
Engine” in the Diesel Engine Supplement. clutch pedal to the floor and start the engine. Your
vehicle won’t start if the clutch pedal is not all the way
Automatic transmission down -- that’s a safety feature.
Move your shift lever to PARK (Pj or NEUTRAL (N). 1. Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turn your
Your engine won’t start in any other position -- that’s a ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let
safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving, go of the key. The idle speed will go down as your
use NEUTRAL ( N j only. engine gets warm.

I NOTICE: I NOTICE:
Don’t try to shift toPARK (P) if your vehicle is Holding your key in START for longer than
moving. If you do, you could damage the 15 seconds at a time will cause your batteryto be
transmission. Shift toPARK (P) only when your drained muchsooner. And the excessive heat can
vehicle isstopped. damage your starter motor.

2. If it doesn’t start right away, hold your key in

START. If it doesn’t start in 10 seconds, push the
accelerator pedal all the way down for five more
seconds, or until it starts.

2-11
3. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then Engine Coolant Heater (Option)
stops), wait 15 seconds and start over.
When the engine starts,let go of the key and the In very cold weather,
accelerator pedal. 0°F (- 18°C) or colder,
the engine coolant heater
can help.
NOTICE:
Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in yourvehicle. If you add electrical
parts oraccessories, you could change theway
the engine operates. Before adding electrical
equipment, check with yourdealer. If you don’t, ~-

your engine might not perform properly.

If you ever have to have your vehicle towed, see You’ll get easier starting and better fuel economy during
the partof this manual that tells how to do it engine warm-up. Usually, the coolant heater should be
without damaging yourvehicle. See “Towing plugged in a minimum of four hours prior to starting
your vehicle.
Your Vehicle” in the Index.
To use the coolant heater:
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 1 10-volt AC outlet.

2-12
 Automatic Transmission Operation

Plugging the cordinto an ungrounded outlet

could cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong
kind of extension cord could overheat andcause
a fire. You could be seriously injured.Plug the
cord into a properly grounded three-prong
110-volt AC outlet. If the cord won’t reach, usea
heavy-duty three-prong extension cord rated for
at least 15 amps.
L

4. After you’ve used the coolant heater, be sure to There are several different positions for your shift lever.
store the cord as it was before to keep it away If your vehicle is equipped with an automatic
from moving engine parts. I f you don‘t, it could transmission, it now features an electronic shift position
be damaged. indicator within the instrument cluster. This display
How long should you keep the coolrmt heater plugged must be powered anytime the shift lever is capable of
in‘? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the being moved out of the PARK (P) position. This means
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead of that if your key is in the OFF position, rather than the
trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact LOCK position, there will be a small current drain on
your GM dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your your battery which could discharge your battery over
vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for that a period of time. If you have to leave y o ~ key
~ r in the
particular area. ignition in the OFF position for an extended period, it is
recommended that you disconnect the battery cable from
the battery to prevent discharging your battery.

2-13
PARK (P): This locks your rear wheels. It’s the best
position to use when you start your engine because your
vehicle can’t move easily.
If you have four-wheel drive, your vehicle
--
will be free toroil even if your shift lever
A CAUTION: --
is in PARK,(P) if your transfercase is in
NEUTRAL (N). So, be sure the transfercase is
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the in a drive gear, two-wheel high (2H) or four-wheel
shift lever is not fully in PARK(P) with the --
high (4H) or four-wheel low (4L) not in
parking brake firmlyset. Your vehiclecan roll. NEUTRAL (N). See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in
the Index. If you’re pulling a trailer,see “Towing a
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engineis
Trailer” in the Index.
running unlessyou have to. If you have left the
engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly.
You or otherscould be injured.To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’reon fairly
level ground, always set your parking brake and
move the shift lever to PARK (P).
CAUTION: (Continued)

2-14
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
A CAUTION:
I NOTICE: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)while
Shifting toREVERSE (R) while your vehicle is your engine is “racing” (running at high speed)is
moving forward could damage your transmission. dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on the
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle brake pedal, your vehicle could move very
is stopped. rapidly. You could lose controland hit people or
objects. Don’t shift outof PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N)while your engine is racing.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transmission, see
“Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow” in the Index.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesn’t
connect with the wheels. To restart when you’re 1 NOTICE:
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed. Damage to your transmission caused by shifting
out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)with the
engine racingisn’t covered by your warranty.

2-15
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE(0): This position is reducing torque to the rear wheels when you are
for normal driving. If you need more power for passing, trying to start your vehicle from a stop on slippery
and you’re: road surhces.
Going less than about 35 mph (56 km/hj, push your FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power
accelerator pedal about halfway down. (but lower fuel economy) than SECOND (2). You can
use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the
Going about 35 mph (56 km/h) or more, push the
selector lever is put in FIRST ( I j while the vehicle is
accelerator all the way down.
moving forward, the transmission won’t shift into first
You’ll shift down to the next gear and have more power. gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (0) can be used when
towing a trailer, carrying a heavy load or driving on
steep hills. You may want to shift the transmission to I NOTICE:
THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower gear selection if the
transmission shifts too often. If your rear wheels can’t rotate, don’t try to
drive. This might happen if you were stuck in
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal
very deep sand or mud or were up against a solid
driving, however it offers more power and lower fuel
economy than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (03). object. You could damage your transmission.
Also, if youstop when going uphill, don’t hold
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but
your vehicle there with only the accelerator
lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2) on hills.
It can help control your speed as you go down steep pedal. This could overheatand damage the
mountain roads, but then you would also want t o use transmission. Use your brakesor shift into
your brakes off and on. PARK (P) to hold your vehicle in position
on a hill.
If yo~rmanually select SECOND (2), the transmission
will drive in second gear. You may use this feature for

2-16
Manual Transmission FIRST (2): Press the clutch pedal and shift into
FIRST (2). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal
5-Speed (with Low Gear) as you press the accelerator pedal.
You can shift into FIRST (2) when you’re going less
than 20 nlph (32 k d h ) . If you’ve come to a complete
stop and it’s hard to shift into FIRST (2), put the shift
lever in NEUTRAL (N) and let up o n the clutch. Press
the clutch pedal back down. Then shift into FIRST (2).
If you try to shift into FIRST (2) at excessive vehicle
speeds, the shift lever will not move into the FIRST (2)
position until vehicle speed is reduced.
SECOND (3): Press the clutch pedal as you let up
on the accelerator pedal and shift into SECOND (3).
Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press
LOW ( 1 ) is intended only for heavy loads and is not the accelerator pedal.
recommended for normal driving. THIRD (4) and FOURTH (5): Shift into the higher
For normal driving conditions,start your vehicle forward gears the same way you do for SECOND (3).
moving i n the second gear position (FIRST (2)). Slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the
accelerator pedal.
LOW (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift into LOW (1).
Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press
accelerator pedal. Shift into LOW (1) only when the the brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press
vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 kmh). If you try to shift the clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift to
into LOW ( I ) at excessive vehicle speeds, the shift lever NEUTRAL (N).
will not move into the LOW ( 1 ) position until vehicle
speed is reduced.

2-17
NEUTRAL (N): Use this position when you start 5-Speed (Without Low Gear)
or idle your engine.
Here’s how to operate your transmission:
REVERSE (R): To back up, first press down the
clutch pedal. Wait about five seconds forthe internal FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift into
parts to stop spinning and then shift into REVERSE (R). FIRST (1). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal
Let up on the clutch pedal slowly while pressing the as you press the accelerator pedal.
accelerator pedal. You can shift into FIRST (1) when you’re going less
than 20 mph (32 km/h). If you’ve come to a complete

I NOTICE: stop and it’s hard to shift into FIRST (I), put the shift
lever in NEUTRAL (N) and let up on the clutch. Press
the clutch pedal back down. Then shift into FIRST (1).
Shift to REVERSE(R) only after your vehicle is SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you let up on
stopped. Shifting to REVERSE(R) while your the accelerator pedal and shift into SECOND (2). Then,
vehicle is moving could damage your transmission. slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the
accelerator pedal.
Also, use REVERSE (R), along with the parking brake, THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5): Shift into
when turning off your engine and parking your vehicle. THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5) the same way
you do for SECOND (2). Slowly let up on the clutch
pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.
To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press the
brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press the
clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift to
NEUTRAL (N).

2-18
 NEUTRAL (N): Use this position when you start or Shift Speeds
idle your engine.
REVERSE (R): To back up, first press down the
clutch pedal. Wait about five seconds for the internal A CAUTION: -- I
' parts to stop spinning and then, shift into REVERSE (R).
Let up on the clutch pedal slowly while pressing If you skip more than one gear when
you
the accelerator pedal. downshift, you could lose controlof your
vehicle. And you could injure yourselfor
others. Don't shift down morethan one gear
NOTICE: when you downshift.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped. Shifting toREVERSE (R) while your
vehicle is moving could damage yourtransmission.
NOTICE:
~~ ~~

Also, use REVERSE (R), along with the parking brake,

If you skip more than one gear when you
when turning off your engine and parking your vehicle.
downshift, or if you race the engine when
you
downshift, you can damage the engine, clutch
or transmission.

2-19
If your speed drops below 20 mph (32 km/h), or if the Shift Light
engine is not running smoothly, you should downshift to
the next lower gear. You may have to downshift two or If you have a manual
Inore gears to keep the engine running smoothly or for transmission, you may have
good performance. a SHIFT light. This light
will show you when to shift
If you have a five-speed manual transmission with low to the next higher gear for
gear (RPO MW3), the following chartsshow when to best fuel economy.
shift tothe next higher gear for best fuel economy.
Acceleration Shift Speeds
SHIFT
VIN Code 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5
4.3L V6 (W) 15 mph 40 mph 50 mph
(80 km/h) When this light comes on, you can shift to the next
(24 k m h ) (64 km/h)
higher gear if weather, road and traffic conditions let
you. For the best fuel economy, accelerate slowly and
Cruise Shift Speeds shift when the light comes on.
4.3L V6 (W) 15 mph 25-40 mph 45-50 mph While you accelerate, it is normal for the light to go
(24 M) (40-64 k d h ) (72-80 k m h ) on and off if you quickly change the position of the
accelerator. Ignore the SHIFT light when you downshift.
If your vehicle has four-wheel drive and is equipped
with a manual transmission, disregard the SHIFT light
when the transfer case is in 4L.

2-20
Locking Rear Axle(Option) Front Axle Locking Feature
If you have this feature, your rear axle can give you The front axlelocks and unlocks automatically when
additional traction on snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It you shift the transfer case. Somedelay for the axle to
works like astandard axle most of the time, but when lock orunlock is normal. If the outside temperature
one of the rear wheels has no traction and the other does, is very hot, or the vehicle has been used under hard
the locking featurewill allow the wheel with traction to driving conditions,there may be a slight delay for the
move the vehicle. axle tounlock.

Four-wheel Drive Manual Transfer Case

If your vehicle has four-wheel drive, you can send your
engine’s driving power to all four wheels for extra
traction. To get the most satisfaction out of four-wheel
drive, you must be familiar with its operation. Read the
part that follows beforeusing four-wheel drive. You
should use 2-WHEEL HIGH (2H) for most normal
driving conditions.

NOTICE:
Driving in the 4-WHEEL HIGH (4H)or
4-WHEEL LOW (4L) positions fora long
time on dry or wet pavement could shorten
the life of your vehicle’sdrivetrain. The transfer case shiftlever is on the floor to the right of
r the driver. Use this lever to shift intoand out of
four-wheel drive.
2-21
 An indicator near the lever shows you the transfer
case settings:
2H (2-Wheel High): This setting is for driving in most
street and highway situations. Your front axle is not
engaged in two-wheel drive.
4H (4-Wheel High): This setting engages your front
axle to help drive your vehicle. Use 4H when you need
extra traction, such as on wet or icy roads, or in most
off-road situations.
N (Neutral): Shift to this setting only when your vehicle
The front axle portion of the indicator diagram will light needs to be towed or when using a power take-off.
LIPwhen you shift into four-wheel drive. 4L (4-Wheel Low): This setting also engages your front
Some delay between shifting and the indicator’s lighting axle to give you extra power, but should be used only
is normal. If the indicator light does not light up, or if for off-road driving.
the front axle light does not go out after you shift out of You can shift from 2-WHEEL HIGH (2H) to 4-WHEEL
four-wheel drive, have your dealer check your system. HIGH (4H) or from 4-WHEEL HIGH (4H) to
2-WHEEL HIGH (2H) while the vehicle is moving.Your
front axle will engage faster if you take your footoff of
the accelerator for a few seconds after you shift. In
extremely cold weather,it may be necessary to stop or
slow the vehicle to shift out of 2-WHEEL HIGH (2H).

2-22
To shift into or out of 4-WHEEL LOW (4L) or Electronic Transfer Case (Option)
NEUTRAL (N):
1. Slow the vehicle to a roll, about 1 to 3 mph
(2 to 5 km/h) and shift an automatic transmission
into NEUTRAL (N), or with a manual transmission
press the clutch pedal.
2. Shift the transfer case shift lever in one
continuous motion.
Don’t pause in NEUTRAL (N) as you shift the
transfer case into 4-WHEEL LOW (4L), or your gears
could clash.
Remember that driving in 4-WHEEL HIGH (4H)
or 4-WHEEL LOW (4L) may reduce fuel economy.
Also, driving in four-wheel drive on dry pavement could
cause your tires to wear faster and make your transfer
case harder to shift. If your four-wheel-drive vehicle has the electronic
transfer case, the transfer case switches are below and to
When your headlamps or parking lamps are on,
the left of the climate control system.
rotate the thumb wheel next to the headlamp switch
up to brighten, or down to dim, your transfer case Use these switches to shift into and out of four-wheel
indicator light. drive. You can choose among three driving settings:
2HI: This setting is for driving in most street and
highway situations. Your front axle is not engaged in
two-wheel drive.

2-23
4HI: This setting engages your front axle to help Shifting from4HI to 2HI
drive your vehicle. Use 4HI when you need extra
Press and release the 2HI switch. This can be done at
traction, such as on snowy or icy roads, or in most
any speed, and the front axlewill unlock automatically.
off-road situations.
4LO: This setting also engages your front axle to give Shifting from 2HI or 4HI to 4LO
.you extra traction. You may never need 4LO. It sends To shift from 2HI or 4HI to 4L0, the vehicle must
the maximum power to all four wheels. You might be stopped or moving less than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) with
choose 4LO if you were driving off-road in sand, mud the transmission in NEUTRAL (N). The preferred
or deep snow and climbing ordescending steep hills. method for shifting into 4LOis to have your vehicle
Indicator lights in the switches show you which setting moving 1 to 2 mph (1-.6to 3.2 km/h). Press and release
you are in. The indicator lights will come,on briefly the 4LO switch. You must wait for the 4LO indicator
when you turn on the ignition and one will stay on. light to stopflashing and remain illuminated before
If the lights do not come on, you should take your shifting your transmission into gear.
vehicle in for service. An indicator light will flash If the 4LO switch is pressed when your vehicle is in
while shifting. It will remain illuminated when the gear and/or moving, the 4LO indicatorlight will flash
shift is completed. for 30 seconds and not complete the shift unless your
vehicle is moving slower than 3 rnph (4.8 kmk)and the
Shifting from2HI to 4HI transmission is in NEUTRAL (N).
Press and release the 4HI switch. This can be done at
any speed, and the front axle will lock automatically.

2-24
Shifting from 4LO to 4HI or 2HI Parking Brake
To shift from 4LO to 4HI or 2H1, your vehicle must be To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal
stopped or moving less than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) with the down with your right foot. Push down the parking brake
transmission in NEUTRAL (N). The preferred method pedal with your left foot.
for shifting outof 4LO is to have your vehicle moving
1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Press and release the 4HI If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will
switch. You must wait for the 4HI indicator light to stop come on.
flashing and remain illuminated before shifting your To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
transmission into gear. pedal down.
If the 4HI switch is pressed when your vehicle is in
Pull the lever, located
gear and/or moving, the 4HI indicator light will flash for
just above the parking
30 seconds but not complete the shift unless the vehicle
brake pedal, marked
is moving slower than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) and the
BRAKE RELEASE.
transmission is in NEUTRAL (N).

If the ignition is on when the parking brake is released,

the brake system warning light will go off.

2-25
 Shifting Into PARK (P) (Automatic
NOTICE: Transmission Models Only)
Driving with the parking brake on can cause
your rear brakesto overheat. You may have
to replace them, andyou could also damage
other partsof your vehicle. Always check to be
It can be dangerous to get ofout your vehicle if
sure your parking brakeis fully released before
the shift lever is notfully in PARK (P) with the
you drive.
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
If you have left the engine running, the pehicle
If you are towing a trailer and are parking,onany hill, can move suddenly.You or others couldbe
see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.’ Thatsection shows injured. To be sure’ your vehicle won’t move,
what to do first to keep the trailer from,moving.
even when you’re on fairlylevel ground, ,use
If you have a 3500 HD model, it is recommended that the steps thatfollow. If you have four-wheel
the propshaft mounted parking brake be burnished as drive and your transfer casein is NEUTRAL (N),
part of the new vehicle break-in. Theparking brake will your vehicle will be freeto roll, even if your shift
work best after it has been burnished following these lever is inPARK (P). So, be sure the transfer case
instructions.,
--
is in a drive gear not in NEUTRAL (N). If
Make 10 stops, using the parking brake foot pedal, from you’re pulling a trailer, see“Tcywing a Trailer”
20 mph (32 k m k ) about 2 1/2 miles (4 km) apart. In in the Index.
between stops, drive the vehicle at 20 mph (32 km/h).
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot
and set the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) position like this:

0 Move the lever up as far as it will go.

3. If you have four-wheel drive, be sure the transfer
case is in a drive gear-- not in NEUTRAL (N).
4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
0 Pull the lever toward you.
5. Remove the key and take it with you. lr you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).

2-27
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
Running (Automatic Transmission running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and the
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you
Models Only) move the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the regular
brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move the shift
lever away from PARK (P) without first pulling it
toward you. If you can, it means that the shift lever
wasn’t fully locked into PARK (P).
It can be dangerous toleave your vehicle with the
engine running. Your vehicle could move suddenly Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission)
if the shift leveris not fully in PARK (P) with the If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your
parking brake firmlyset. If you have four-wheel transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of
drive with a manual transfer case shift lever and the vehicle may put too much force on the parking
your transfer case is in NEUTRAL (N), your pawl in the transmission. You may find it difficult to
vehicle will be free toroll, even if your shift lever pull the shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called
is in PARK (P). So be sure the transfercase is in a “torque lock.” To prevent torque lock, set the parking
--
drive gear not in NEUTRAL (N). And, if you
brake and then shift into PARK (P) properly before you
leave the driver’s seat. To find out how, see “Shifting
leave the vehicle with the engine running, it could Into PARK (P)” in the Index.
overheat and even catch fire. You or otherscould
be injured. Don’t leave your vehicle with the When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
engine runningunless you have to. PARK (P) hq%re you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the transmission, so you can pull the shift
lever out of PARK (P).

2-2s
Parking Your Vehicle (Manual Parking Over Things That Burn
Transmission Models Only)
Before you get outof your vehicle, put your manual
transmission in REVERSE (R), turn off the engine, and
firmly .apply the parkingbrake.
If you have four-wheel drive, be sure your transfer case
is in a drive gear. Your vehicle could roll if it isn’t.
If you are parkingon a hill, or if you are pullinga
trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in theIndex.

i
A CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Don’t park
over papers, leaves, dry
grass or other things that
burn. can

2-29
Engine Exhaust Running Your Engine While You’re
Parked (Automatic Transmission)
It’s better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
Engine exhaust cankill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO),which you can’t see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.
You might have exhaust comingin if: Idling the enginewith the airsystem controloff
Your exhaust system sounds strange ordifferent. could allow dangerous exhaust into your vehicle
Your vehicle gets rusty underneath. (see the earlier Caution under “Engine Exhaust”).
Your vehicle was damaged in a collision. Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
Your vehicle was damaged when driving over carbon monoxide (CO)into your vehicle even if
high points on the roador over road debris. the fan switchis at the highest setting. One place
Repairs weren’t done correctly; this can happenis a garage. Exhaust with --
Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
--
CO can come in easily. NEVER park in a
garage with the engine running.
If you ever suspect exhaustis coming into Another closed-in place canbe a blizzard. (See
your vehicle: “Blizzard” in the Index.)
Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

2-30
 Windows
Manual Windows
Turn the hand crank on each door to raise or lower
It canbe dangerous to get out of your vehicle if manual windows.
the shift leveris not fully inPARK (P) with the
parking brake firmlyset. Your vehiclecan roll. Power Windows
Don’t leave yourvehicle when the engineis If you have the optional
running unless you have to. If you’ve left the power windows, the
controls areon each of
engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly.
the side doors.
You or otherscould be injured. To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly The driver’s door has a
level ground, always set your parking brake and switch for the passenger
move the shift lever to PARK (P). windows as well. Your
power windows will
work when the ignition
If you have four-wheel drive and your transfer case is has been turned to
in NEUTRAL (N), your vehicle will be free to roll, ACCESSORY or RUN.
even if your shift lever is in PARK (P). So, be sure the
transfer case is in a drive gear -- not in NEUTRAL (N). Press the rear of the switch with the power window
Always set your parking brake. Follow the proper steps symbol on it to lower the window.
to be sure your vehicle won’t move. See “Shifting Into Press the front of the switch with the power window
PARK (P)” in the Index. symbol on it to raise the window.
If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in The driver’s window also has an express down feature
the Index. that allows the window to lower without holding the
switch. Press and hold the side of the window switch
marked AUTO for one second to activate the express
2-31
down mode. The express down mode can be canceled at Sliding Rear Window(Option)
any time by pressing the opposite sideof the switch. To
open the window part way, lightly tap the switch until To open the sliding rear window, unlock the latch lever
the window is at the desired position. by moving the lever toward the driver’s side. Release
the lever from the latch plate and slide the window
Lockout Switch (Crew Cab) toward the driver’s side of the vehicle.
If you have a Crew Cab and power windows, the power To close the window, slide the window toward the
window switch has a lockout feature. Thisfeature passenger’s side of the vehicle. The latch lever will
prevents the rear windows from operating when the automatically snap locked on the latch plate. Try to open
front driver’s side switch is in the lockout position. The the window without releasing the latch lever to be sure
windows can still be operated using the driver’s window the window is in the locked position.
switch. When the switch is moved out of the lockout
position, the rear power windows will operate again. Horn
On air bag-equipped vehicles, press the air bag module
Swing-Out Windows (Extended Cab) in the center of the steering wheel to sound the horn.
To open a rear swing-out On vehicles not equipped with an air bag, press the pad
window, just flip the in the center of the steering wheel to sound the horn.
latch open and swing
the glass out.
The latch will catch when
the window is fully open
and hold the window in the
open position.

2-32
Tilt Wheel (Option) Turn SignalMultifunction Lever
A tilt steering wheel allows
you to adjust the steering
wheel before you drive.

You can also raise it to the highest level to give your

legs more room when you enter and exit the vehicle.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the includes your:
lever. Move the steering wheel to a comfortable level,
then release the lever to lock the wheel in place. 0 Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator
0 Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer
0 Windshield Wipers
0 Windshield Washer
Cruise Control (Option)

2-33
Turn Signal and Lane Change Signals I f you move the lever all the way up or down, and the
arrow flashes at twice the normal rate, a signal bulb
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two may be burned out and other drivers may not see your
downward (for left)positions. These positions allow you turn signal.
to signal a turn or a lane change.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you
down. When the turn is finished, the leverwill signal a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and a blown
return automatically. fuse (see “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index).
An arrow on the instrument Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer
panel will flash in the
direction of the turn or To change the headlamps from low beam to high or high
lane change. to low, pull the multifunction lever all the way toward
you. Then release it.
When the high beams
are on, this light on the
instrument panel also
will be on.

To signal a lane change, justraise or lower the lever

until the arrow starts toflash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. Thelever will return by
itself when you release it.

2-34
Windshield Wipers For steady wiping at low speed, turn the knob to the
LOW position. For high-speed wiping, turn the knob
I You control the windshield further, to HIGH. To stop the wipers, move the knob to
the OFF position.
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If they are frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades do become
damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
Windshield Washer
At the top of the lever,
there’s a paddle with
For a single wiping cycle, turn the knob to MIST. Hold the word PUSH on it.
it there until the wipers start, then let go. The wipers will To spray washer fluid
stop after one cycle.If you want more cycles, hold the on the windshield, push
knob on MIST longer. the paddle.
You can set the wiper speed for a long or short delay
between wipes. This can be very useful in light rain or
snow. Turn the knob to choose the delay time. The
closer to LOW, the shorter the delay.
Washer fluid will spray as long as you push the paddle.
When you let go of the paddle, the wipers will continue
to wipe for a few seconds and then either stop orreturn
to the preset speed.

2-35
Driving without washer fluid can be dangerous. A When you apply your brakes, the cruise control
bad mud splash can block your vision. You could hit shuts off.
another vehicle or go off the road. Check your washer
fluid level often. .

-
A CAUTIVIF: I
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
can’t drivesafely at a steady speed. So,
I1 reezing weather, don’t use your washer until don’t use your cruise control on winding
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer roads orin heavy traffic.
fluid can formice on the windshield, blocking Cruise control can be dangerous on
your vision, slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes
in tire traction can cause needless
wheel
spinning, andyou could lose control.Don’t
Cruise Control (Option) use cruise control on slippery roads.
With cruise control, you can
maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more
without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This can
really help on long trips.
Cruise control does not
work at speeds below about
25 mph (40 km/h).

2-36
Setting Cruise Control Kesuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This, of course, shuts off
I /:\ CAUTION: the cruise control. But you don’t need to reset it.

If you leave your cruise control switch on when Once you’re going about
you’re not using cruise, you might hita button 25 mph (40 km/h) or more,
you can move the cruise
and go into cruisewhen you don’t wantto. You switch from ON to RIA
could be startled and even lose control. Keep the (Resume/Accelerate) for
cruise control switchOFF until you want to use it. about a 1/2 second.

1 . Move the cruise switch to ON.

2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Press in the SET button
at the end of the lever You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and
and release it. stay there.
Remember, if you hold the switch at R/A longer than
a 1/2 second, the vehicle will keep going faster until
you release the switch or apply the brake. You could be
startled and even lose control. So unless you want to go
faster, don’t hold the switch at R/A.

4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

2-37
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control
There aretwo ways to go toa higher speed: Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed. When
Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed. you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will slow
Press the button at the end of the lever, then release down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
the button and the accelerator pedal. You’ll now
cruise at the higher speed. Using Cruise Controlon Hills
Move the cruise switch from ON to WA. Hold it How well your cruise control will workon hills depends
there until you get up to the speed you want, and upon your speed, load and the steepness of the hills.
then release the switch. (To increase your speed in When going up steep hills,you may have to step on the
very small amounts, move the switch to R/A for less accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.If the steepness
than a 1/2 second. Each time you do this, your of the hill causes the vehicle speed to drop more than
vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.) 15 mph (24 krn/h) below the set speed, your cruise control
will automatically disengage. When going downhill,you
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control may have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keepyour
speed down. Of course, applying the brake takes youout
There are two ways to reduce your speed while using of cruise control. Many drivers find thisto be too much
cruise control: trouble and don’t use cruise control on steep hills.
Press in the button at the end of the lever until you
reach the lower speed you want, then release it. Ending Cruise Control
To slow down in very small amounts, press the There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:
button for less than a 1/2 second. Each time you do
Step lightly on the brake pedal; or
this, you’ll go 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Move the cruise switch to OFF.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition,
your cruise control set speed memory is erased.
2-38
Lamps Rotate the knob clockwise again to the master lamp
symbol to turn on all the lamps listed as well as
Your parking lamp and the headlamps.
headlamp switch is on the Rotate the knob counterclockwise to OFF to turn off
driver’s sideof your your lamps.
instrument panel.
Rotate the thumb wheel next to the knob up to adjust
instrument panel lights. Rotatethe thumb wheel up to
the first notch to return the radio display and gearshift
indicator LEDdisplay to full intensity when the
headlamps or parking lamps are on.
You can switch your headlamps from high to low beams
by pulling on the turn signalhigh-beam lever.
Rotate the knob clockwise to the parking lamp symbol
to turn on: Headlamps On Reminder
Parking Lamps A buzzer will sound when your headlamps are turned on
and the key is turned to the OFF, LOCK or
0 Sidemarker Lamps ACCESSORY position. If you need to use your
Clearance Lamps (If So Equipped) headlamps when the key is turned to OFF, LOCK or
ACCESSORY, the buzzer can be turned off by turning
Taillamps the thumb wheel next to the parking lamp/headlamp
License Plate Lamps knob all the way down.
Instrument Panel Lights
Transfer Case Shift Indicator Light
(Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles)

2-39
Daytime Running Lamps When it begins to get dark, your DRL indicator light
is a reminder to turn your headlamp switch on. The
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for other lamps that come on with your headlamps will
others to see the front of your vehicle during the day. also come on.
DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the When you turn off the headlamp switch, the regular
short periods after dawn and before sunset. lamps will go off, and your headlamps will change to
the reduced brightness of DRL.
The DRL system will make your headlamps come on at
a reduced brightness when: To idle your vehicle with the DRL off, set the parking
brake. The DRL will stay off until you release the
the ignition is on, parking brake.
the headlamp switch is off, and As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
the parking brake is released. headlamp system when you need it.
When the DRL are on, only your headlamps will be on.
The taillamps, sidemarker and other lamps won’t be on.
Your instrument panel won’t be lit up either.

2-40
Fog Lamps Underhood Reel Lamp
If you have fog lamps, use them for better vision in foggy
or misty conditions. Your parking lamps andor low-beam
headlamps must be on for your fog lamps to work.
The fog lamp switch is on
the lower edge of your
instrument panel.

Press the ribbed top part of the switch to turn the fog If you have an underhood reel lamp, it is located inside
lamps on. Press the bottom of the switch to turn them the engine compartment on the rear passenger side of
off. A light will glow in the switch when the fog lamps the engine compartment. You can use it as a flashlight.
are on.
To use the lamp, pull up on the lever beside it and pull
Remember, fog lamps alone will not give off as much the lamp out. The cord will unreel as you pull the lamp.
light as your headlamps. Never use your fog lamps i n When you are done using the lamp, reel the cord back
the dark without turning on your headlamps. into the housing by turning the handle.
Fog lamps w i l l go off whenever your high-beam Then, slide the lamp into the holder. Press PUSH on the
headlamps come on. When the high beams go off, the lever to hook the lamp into the holder.
fog lamps will come on again.
2-41
Interior Lamps Front Reading Lamps(Option)
Instrument Panel Intensity Control If your vehicle has reading
The instrument panel intensity control is located to the lamps, press the button next
right of the headlamp switch. to the lamp to turn the lamp
on. The lamps can be
Rotate the thumb wheel up to adjust instrument panel adjusted to point in the
lights. Rotate the thumb wheel up to the first notch to direction you want.
return the radio display and gearshift indicator LED
display to full intensity when the headlamps or parking
lamps are on. To turn on the dome lamps (with the
vehicle doors closed) rotate the thumb wheel up to the
second notch position.
Illuminated Entry Press the button again to turn the lamp off.
Your vehicle may be equipped with an illuminated
entry feature. Dome Lamps
When the doors are opened,the dome lamps will come The dome lamps will come on when you open the doors.
on if the dome lamp button is out. When all the doors You can also turn the dome lamps on by rotating the
are closed, orthe dome lamp button is pressed in, the thumb wheel, located next to the parking/headlamps
lamps will stay on for a short period of time and will knob, all the way up to the second notch. In this
then go out. position, the dome lamps will remain on whether the
doors areopened or closed.
You can use the dome lamp button, located below the
parking/headlamp knob, to set the

2-42
dome lamps to come on automatically when the doors Mirrors
are open, orremain off. To turn the lamps off, press the
button once. With the button in this position, the dome Inside Daymight Rearview Mirror
lamps will remain off when the doors are open.To
return the lamps to automatic operation,press the button . ..
again and return it to the “out” position. With the button
in this position, the dome lamps will come on when you
open the door.
Cargo Lamp
Press the ribbed top part of
the switch to turn the cargo
lamp on. Press the bottom
of the switch to turn it off.

Press or pull the tab under the mirror to reduce dare

from headlamps behind you after dark.

The dome lamp switch must be on or one of the doors

open for the cargo lamp to work.

2-43
Electrochromic Inside Rearview Mirror When the ignition is on and the mirror switch is in the
with Compass (Option) C/M position, the compass display will show two
character boxes for approximately two seconds. If, after
Your vehicle may have an electrochromic inside two seconds, the display does not show a compass
rearview mirror. heading (N for North, for example),there may be a
When on, the mirror automatically dims to the proper strong magnetic field interfering with the compass. Such
level to minimize glare from lights behind you after dark. interference may include magnetic antenna mounts, a
magnetic note pad holder, or a similar magnetic item. If
The mirror also includes removing these items does not correct the condition, see
an eight point compass your GM dealer for assistance.
display in the upper right When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
corner of the mirror Face. material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
When on, the compass glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
Compass Variance
Under certain circumstances, as during a long distance
cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust the
compass to compensate for compass variance. Compass
variance is the difference between earth's magnetic
north and true geographic north. If not adjusted to
To use the electrochromic mirror only, move the switch account for compass variance, your compass could give
at the bottom of the mirror to the M position. To use the false readings.
electrochromic mirror as well as the compass, move the
switch to the C/M position. To turn both features off,
move the switch to the OFF position.

2-44
To adjust for compass variance: 3. Press the CAL switch on the bottom of the mirror
until the new zone number appears in the display.
1. Use the CAL switch located at the bottom of the
After you stop pressing the button in, the display will
mirror housing near the on/off switch. A safety pin
show a compass direction within a few seconds.
or paper clip can be used to press in the button. Press
and hold the CAL switch for five secondsuntil a Outside Manual Adjust Mirror
zone number appears in the display.
Adjust your outside mirrors so you can just see the side
2. Find your current location and variance zone number of your vehicle and have a clearview of objects behind
on the following zone map. you. Some mirrors can be folded in to enter narrow
doorways.

Power Remote Control Mirror (Option)

Select the mirror you want
to move by moving the
center of the switch, located
on the driver’s door armrest,
to R (right) or L (left).

Then, adjust the mirror angle by pressing the outer

arrows on the switch until the mirror is adjusted where
you want it.

2-45
Convex Outside Mirror Center Overhead Console (Option)
Your passenger’s side mirror may be convex. A convex Your vehicle may have an overhead console. It has
mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from the storage compartments inside it.
driver’s seat.
stalling a Garage Door Opener
If you have a garage door opener, thefront overhead
A CAUTION: II
compartment can be used to conveniently store the opener.

A convex mirrorcan make things (like other To install the garage

door opener, first open
vehicles) look farther away than they really are. the compartment door by
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you pressing the release
could hita vehicle on your right. Check your button forward.
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.

Storage Compartments
Your vehicle has a variety of storage compartments
designed to store small items.
Glove Box
To open your glove box, move the button toward the
passenger side and pull the door open.

2-46
 Peel the protective backing The pegs inside the
from the hook and loop compartment door are used
patch. Press it firmly to the to make sure the button on
back of your garage door the compartment door will
opener, as close to the contact the control button
center of the opener as on the garage door opener.
I

Center the garage door opener activation button over Add one peg at a time until the PUSH button on the
the console door button, and press the opener firmly compartment door operatesthe garage door opener, with
into place. the compartment door closed, when you press the button
marked PUSH.
Now, with the compartment door closed, press the
button marked PUSH again to make sure the garage
door opener operates properly.

2-47
 With the garage door opener
positioned properly and the
right number of pegs in
place, you should only have
to press the PUSH button
slightly to operate the
opener.

Adjust the positionof the garage door opener and add or

remove pegs, as needed,until the opener operates properly.
Place your sunglasses in the compartment door with the
Sunglasses Storage Compartment lenses facing out.
The center overhead Compartment can be used to The rear compartment can be used to store a small item,
conveniently store your sunglasses. like a book.
To open the center compartment, press the release To open the rear compartment, press the release button
button located at the rear of the compartment door. located at the rearof the compartment door.

2-48
Memo Pad Holder
Your vehicle may have a
- To use the cupholder, pull
the handle and slide the
cupholder tray open.
memo holder attached to the
To close the cupholder,
front of the console. Use it
slide it back in the
to hold pads of paper or
instrument panel.
similar items.

Two cup depressions are provided above the glove box

on top of the instrument panel to hold cups or other
Instrument Panel Cupholder containers when the vehicle is not moving.
Your vehicle has a cupholder in the middle of the Center Console Storage Area
instrument panel.
Your vehicle may have a consolecompartment between
the bucket seats.

2-49
 There is also a drawer that
slides out at the bottom of
the console.

Cassette/Compact Disc Storage

To open it, lift the latch handle and swing the door open.
Your vehicle may have a
Your console also has a cassettekompact disc holder
cupholder that swings out at the front of the console.
for the back seat passengers The holder will store up to
to use. four compact disc cases, up
to four cassette tape cases,
or any combination of these
items that adds up to four.

2-50
Your vehicle includes a number of storage Underhood Storage Area
compartments for storageof often used items.
Some vehicles have storage areas in the instrument
panel. Use these spaces foritems such as gloves or
small books.
Some models have a storage pocket on each of the
front doors.
Some vehicles have a storage areabehind the seat.
Armrest Storage Compartment
Your vehicle may have a center armrest storage
compartment in the front bench seat.
To open it, fold down the armrest, press the latch handle
located at the front of the armrest. Then,let the lid pop
up and swing open.
There is a storage compartment in the front driver's side
The storage compartment has a cassette/compact disc of the engine compartment. Lift the cover to access the
holder. The holder will store up to five compact disc storage area.
cases and up to six cassette tape cases.
The storage compartment also has a folding writing
table on top of the armrest lid.
To use the writing table, pull the latch at the rear of the
table and swing the writing table forward. Use it to hold
pads of paper and a pen.

2-51
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter To remove a rear ashtray, press down on the inside tabs
and open the door fully.
Front Ashtray
The front ashtray is located at the bottomof the instrument NOTICE:
panel. Pull on the notch inthe ashtray door to open it.
t If you store paper or other things that burn in
NOTICE: your ashtrays, theycould be set on fireby
cigarettes or other smoking materials. That could
If you store paper or other things that burn
in cause a fire and possibly damage your vehicle. Do
your ashtrays, they could be set on fire
by not store papers and other things that burnin
cigarettes or other smoking materials. That could your ashtrays.
cause a fire andpossibly damage yourvehicle. Do
not store papers and other things that burn
in To use the cigarette lighter, push it in all the way, and let
your ashtrays. go. When it’s ready, it will pop back by itself.

To remove the front ashtray, press the retainer spring NOTICE:

and pivot the ashtray toward you. To replace the ashtray,
place the bottom part of the ashtray on the pivot bar at
the bottom of its mounting on the instrument panel. Holding a cigarette lighter inwith your hand
Then rotate the ashtray back to its original position. while it is heating can make it overload,
damaging the lighter and the heating element.
Rear Ashtray way in and let go.
Just push the lighter all the
To use a rear ashtray, if you have them, pull at the top of When it’s done, itwill pop back by itself.
the ashtray door to flipthe door open.

2-52
Accessory Power Outlets Sun Visors
To block out glare, you can swing down the visors. You
can also swing them out to help block glare at the front
and side windows.
Your visor may have a strap to hold small items, such
as maps.
Some visors have an
extender on the inside
edge. When the visor is
down, pull the extender
out for extra glarecoverage
at the front or side.

Two auxiliary power outlets are located near the

cigarette lighter. Use these outlets to power mobile
telephones or other devicesdesigned to operate with
Some visors have mirrors with lamps. If the mirror has
vehicle electrical systems.
lamps, they will come on when you lift the mirror cover.

2-53
Instrument Panel

2-54
A. Dome Lamp Switch K. Ashtray
B. Lamp Controls L.Cupholder
C. Air Outlets M. Auxiliary Power Outlets
D. Multifunction Lever N. Storage Area or Compact Disc Player (Option)
E. Instrument Cluster 0. Rear Window Defogger Switch (Option)
E Gearshift Lever P. Tilt Lever (Option)
G. Audio System Q. Parking Brake Release
H. Comfort Control System R. Hood Release
I. Glove Box S. Fuse Block
J. Storage Tray

2-55
Instrument Panel Cluster

CHECK
GAGES

SERVICE
ENGINE
SOON

r A 6 i E R A K E TO SHIFT FROM PARK 1

l o l o l o l o ] TRIP [o 0 0 0 0 010~1

United States version shown, Canada similar.

Your instrument cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You'll know how
fast you're going, about how much fuel you have and many other things you'll need to know to drive safely
and economically.

2-56
Speedometer and Odometer Tachometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles Your tachometer displays the engine speed in
per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h). Your revolutions per minute (rpm).
odometer shows how far your vehicle has been driven, ~~ ~ . -~

in either miles (used in the United States) or kilometers

(used in Canada). NOTICE:
Tamper-Resistant Odometer If you operate the engine with the tachometer in
Your odometer is tamper-resistant. The odometer will the red area, your engineor other parts couldbe
show silver lines between the numbers if someone tries damaged.
to turn it back. Damage to your engine or vehicle caused by
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a operating the engine in the red area isn’t covered
new odometer installed. If the new odometer can be set by your vehicle warranty. Don’t operate the
to the mileage total of the old odometer, then it must be. engine with the tachometerin the red area.
But if it can’t, then it’s set at zero, and a label must be
put on the driver’s doorto show the old mileage reading
when the new odometer was installed.
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle has
been driven since you last set the trip odometer to zero.
To reset the trip odometer, fully press the reset button
located near the trip odometer readout. If the reset
button is not fully pressed, the trip odometer may not go
all the way back to zero. If it doesn’t, you may have to
press the reset button again to reset the readout to zero.
Warning Lights, Gages When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, orwhen one of the gages shows
and Indicators there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
This part describes the warning lights and gages that what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you Waiting to do repairs can be costly -- and even
locate them. dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights
and gages. They’re a big help.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an Safety Belt Reminder Light
expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you or When the key is turned to RUN or START, a tone will
others from injury. come on for about eight seconds to remind people to
fasten their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a already buckled.
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you
will see in the details on the next few pages, some The safety belt light will
warning lights come on briefly when you start the also come on and stay
engine just tolet you know they’re working. If you are on for about 20 seconds,
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed then it will flash for about
when this happens. 55 seconds. If the driver’s
Gages can indicatewhen there may be or is a problem belt is already buckled,
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages and neither the tone nor the
warning lights work together to let you know when light will come on.
there’s a problem with your vehicle.

2-58
Air Bag Readiness Light Charging System Indicator Light
There is an air bag readiness lighton the instrument This light should come on
panel, which shows AIR BAG. The system checks the briefly when you turn on the
air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions. Thelight ignition, before starting the
tells you if there is an electrical problem. The system engine, as acheck to show
check includes the air bag sensors, the air bag module,
the wiring and the diagnostic module. For more
information on the air bag system, see“Air Bag” in
the Index.
You will see this light flash
for a few seconds when you
turn your ignition to RUN
or START. Then the light After the engine starts,the light should go out. If it stays
AIR should go out. This means on or comes on while you are driving, you may have a
the system is ready. problem with your charging system.It could indicate a
BAG problem with the alternator drivebelt, or some other
charging system problem. Have it checked right away.
Driving while this light is on could drain your battery.
If you must drive a short distancewith this light on, it
helps to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio
If the air bag readiness light doesn’tcome on when you and air conditioner.
start your vehicle, or stayson, or comes on when you
are driving,your air bag system may not work properly.
Have your vehicle servicedright away.

2-59
Voltmeter Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a
large number of electrical accessories are operating in
When your engine is not the vehicle and the engine is left at an idle for an
running, but the ignition is extended period. This condition is normal since the
in the RUN position, this charging system is not able to provide full power at
gage shows your battery's engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, this
state of charge in DC volts. condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds

b
9 19
allow the charging system to create maximum power.
You can only drive for a short time with the reading in
either warning zone. If you must drive, turn off all
unnecessary accessories.
Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible
When the engine is running, the gage shows the problem in the electrical system. Have the vehicle
condition of the charging system. Readings between the serviced as soon as possible.
low and high warning zones indicate the normal
operating range.

2-60
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though,you Your brake system may not be working properly
need both parts working well. if the brake system warning light is on. Driving
If the warning light comes on, there couldbe a brake with the brakesystem warning light oncan lead
problem. Have your brake system inspected right away. to an accident. If the lightis still on after you’ve
pulled off the road and stopped carefully,have
This light should come the vehicle towedfor service.
on briefly when you turn
the ignition key to RUN.
If it doesn’t come on then, When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
have it fixed so it will be will also come on when you set your parking brake. The
ready to warn you if there’s light will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t release
a problem. fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is fully
BRAKE released, it means you have a brake problem.

If the light comes on while you are driving,pull off the

road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push. Or,the pedal may go closer tothe floor.
It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the
vehicle towed for service. (See “Towing Your Vehicle”
in the Index.)

2-61
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
With the anti-lock brake This gage shows the engine
system, this light will come coolant temperature.
on when you start your J

engine and may stay on

for severalseconds.
That’s normal.
ANTI -
LOCK

If the ‘lightstays on, or comes on when you’re driving, It also provides an indicator of how hard your vehicle is
your vehicle needs service. If the regularbrake system working. During a majority of the operation,the gage
warning light isn’t on, you still have’brakes, but you will read 2 10 F ( 100 C) orless. If you are pulling a
O

don’t have anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake system load or going up hills, it is normal for the temperature to
warning light is also on, you don’t have anti-lock brakes fluctuate and approach the 260°F (125°C) mark. If the
and there’s a problem with your regular brakes. See gage reaches the 260°F ( 125“C).mark, it indicates that
“Brake System Warning Light” earlier in this part. the cooling system is working beyond its capacity.
The anti-lock brake system warning light should come In “Problems on the Road,” this manual shows what to
on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the do. See“Engine Overheating” in the Index.
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be
ready: to warn you if there is a problem.

2-62
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (Service
Engine Soon Light) (Gasoline Engine) NOTICE:
Your vehicle is equipped If you keep driving your vehicle with this light
with a computer which on, after a while, youremission controls maynot
monitors operation of the work as well, your fuel economy may not be as
fuel, ignition and emission
SERVICE good and yourengine may not run as smoothly.
ENGINE This could lead to costlyrepairs that maynot be
covered by your warranty.
SOON
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is not
running. If the light doesn’t come on, have it repaired.
This system is called OBD I1 (On-Board This light will also come on during a malfunction in one
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to of two ways:
assure that emissions areat acceptable levels forthe
Light Flashing -- A misfire condition has been
life of the vehicle, helpingto produce a cleaner
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and
environment. (In Canada, OBD I1 is replaced by
may damage the emission controlsystem on your
Enhanced Diagnostics.) The SERVICE ENGINE SOON
vehicle. Dealer or qualified service centerdiagnosis
light comes on to indicate that there is a problem and
and service is required.
service is required. Malfunctions often will be indicated
by the system before any problem is apparent, which Light On Steady -- An emission control system
may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle. This malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
system is also designedto assist your service technician Dealer or qualified service center diagnosisand
in correctly diagnosingany malfunction. service may be required.

2-63
If the LightIs Flashing If the LightIs On Steady
The following may prevent more serious damage to You may be able to correct the emission system
your vehicle: malfunction by considering the following:
0 Reduce vehicle speed. Did you just put fuel into your vehicle?
Avoid hard accelerations. If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
Avoid steep uphill grades. the cap. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel
cap has been left off or improperly installed. This will
If towing a trailer, reduce the amount of cargo being allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few
hauled as soon as it is possible. driving trips should turn the light off.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
the Light Is On Steady” following.
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so, will usually be corrected when the electrical system
stop the vehicle. Put your vehicle in PARK (P). Turn the dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart the engine.
If the light remains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Are you low on fuel?
Steady” following. If the light is still flashing follow the As your engine startsto run out of fuel, your engine may
previous steps, and drive the vehicle to your dealer or not run as efficiently as designed since small amounts of
qualified service center forservice. air are sucked into the fuel line causing a misfire. The
system can detect this. Adding fuel should correct this
condition. Make sure to install the fuel cap properly. It
will take a few driving trips to turn the light off.

2-64
Have you recently changed brands of fuel? Oil Pressure Gage
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel (see The oil pressure gage shows
“Fuel” in the Index). Poor fuel quality will cause your the engine oil pressure in psi
engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You may (pounds per square inch)
notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when you when the engine is running.
put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on Canadian vehicles indicate
acceleration or stumblingon acceleration. (These 80
pressure in kPa (kilopascals).
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the light
to turn on.
If you experience this condition, change the fuel brand
you use. It will require at least one full tank of the
proper fuel to turn the light off. Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off, temperature and oil viscosity, but readings above the
have your dealer or qualified service center check the low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range.
vehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipment and A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical by a dangerously low oil level or some other problem
problems that may have developed. causing low oil pressure. Check your oil as soon
as possible.

2-65
 Shift Light
I A LAUTION: This light is used on some
models with manual
Don’t keep drivingif the oil pressure is low. If transmissions.
you do, your engine canbecome so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soonas possible and have your
vehicle serviced.
SHIFT

I NOTICE: I The SHIFT indicator light will help you get the best fuel
economy. See “Shift Light” or “Shift Speeds” in this
Damage to your engine from neglectedoil section for more information.
problems can becostly and is not coveredby your
warranty.

2-66
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator Light Check Gages Light
This light goes on whenever This light will come on

:::O
0.0
the DRL are on.

CHECK
GAGES
briefly when you are
starting the engine.

When it begins to get dark, the DRL indicator light is a If the light comes on and stays on while you are driving,
reminder to turn on your headlamps. it could indicate a problem with your vehicle. It could be
a problem with your oil pressure, coolant temperature,
or some other problem. Check your various gages to see
if they are in the warning zones. If they are, have your
vehicle serviced right away.

2-67
Fuel Gage Here are four situations you may experience with your
fuel gage. None of these indicate a problem with the
The fuel gage, when the fuel gage.
ignition is on, tells you 0 At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts off before the
about how much fuel you gage reads FULL (F).
have left in your tank.
0 It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
fuel gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a
little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to fill
the tank.
0 The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or
speed up.
The gage will first indicate EMPTY (E) before you 0 The gage doesn’t go back to EMPTY (E) when you
are outof fuel, and you should get more fuel as soon turn off the ignition.
as possible.
If you have a diesel engine, see“Fuel Gage” in the
Diesel Engine Supplement.

2-68
 Section 3 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
,,. .--

In this section you’ll find out how to operate the comfort Fan Knob
control and audio systems offered with your vehicle. Be The knob on the left side of the heating system control
sure to read about the particular systems supplied with panel controls the fan speed.The knob has four speed
your vehicle. positions. To increase airflow, move the knob toward
Comfort Controls HI. To decrease airflow, move it toward LO. To turn the
fan off, move the knob to OFF.
Standard Climate Control System
Temperature Knob
The middle knob on the control panel lets you select the
relative temperature of the air flowing intothe passenger
area of your vehicle. This knob will allow you to adjust
the relative air temperature independently of the
function knob setting. Move the knob clockwise
toward the red area forwarmer air. Move the knob
counterclockwise toward the blue area for coolerair.

3-1
Mode Knob Optional Climate Control System
The right knob on the control panel allows you to
choose the direction of air delivery. The control knob
can be placed in any position between two mode settings
to blend the flow of air.
*e
/II VENT This setting directs air through the
instrument panel outlets.

+’
-be
+# VENTMEAT: Use this setting to divide airflow
between the floor outlets and instrument panel outlets.
HEATER: This setting directs air through the
floor outlets.
w.
?,p#DEFOG: This setting directs air to the heater
Fan Knob
outlets and toward the windshield. The knob on the left side of the heating system control
panel controls the fan speed. The knob has four speed
DEFROST This settingdirects air toward positions. To increase airflow, move the knob toward
the windshield. HI. To decrease airflow, move it toward LO. To turn the
fan off, move the knob to OFF. If you have the air
conditioner on, moving the fan knob to OFF also turns
off the A/C compressor.

3-2
Temperature Knob
The middle knob on the control panel lets you select the
Q.
+’ DEFOG: This setting directs air to the heater
relative temperature of the air flowing into the passenger outlets and toward the windshield.
area of your vehicle. Thisknob will allow you to adjust DEFROST This setting directs air toward the
the relative air temperatureindependently of the windshield.
function knob setting. Move the knob clockwise
toward the red area for warmer air. Move the knob Air Conditioning
counterclockwise toward the blue area for coolerair.
On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hot
Mode Knob air inside escape. Thisreduces the time it takes for your
vehicle to cool down. Then keep your windows closed
The right knob on the control panel allows you to for the air conditionerto work it’s best.
choose the direction of air delivery. The control knob
can be placed in any position between two mode settings The recirculation button, between the fan and
to blend the flow of air. temperature knobs, allows the air inside your vehicle to
-bo be recirculated. This setting helps to maximize your air
/J VENT: This setting directs airthrough the conditioner’s performance and your vehicle’s fuel
instrument panel outlets. economy. This setting also coolsthe air the fastest and
can be used to keep unwanted odors and/ordust from
+ ’
+0
VENT/HEAT: Use this setting to divide airflow

+’
entering the vehicle. When using the air conditioner,
between the floor outletsand instrument panel outlets. turn off recirculation after the vehicle reaches a
0
HEATER: This setting directs airthrough the comfortable interior temperature. When the right knob
heater floor outlets. on the control panel is between HEATER and
DEFROST, the recirculation feature will not function.

3-3
The A/C button, between the temperature and mode The use of an engine coolant heater also reduces the
knobs, allows the air coming into your vehicle to be time it takes for the engine to reach normal operating
cooled. This settingis useful for normal cooling on hot temperature, and shortens the time it takes the heater to
days. When you use A/C with the recirculation button reach full output. For more information, see “Engine
pushed in, turn off recirculation as soon as the vehicle Coolant Heater” in the Index.
reaches a comfortableinterior temperature.
Ventilation System
With the A/C on, move the temperature knob to MAX
for maximum cooling. This setting also puts the system For mild outside temperature when little heating or
in the recirculation mode and helps to maximize your air cooling is needed, use VENT to direct outside air
conditioner’s performance and your vehicle’s fuel through your vehicle. Air will flow through the
economy. This setting also cools the airthe fastest. After instrument panel outlets.
the vehicle’s interior reaches a comfortabletemperature, Your vehicle’s ventilation system supplies outside air
move the temperature knob clockwise toplace the air to the inside of your vehicle when it is moving. With
conditioning system in the normal mode. the side windows closed, airwill flow into the front
air inlet grilles, through the vehicle, and out the air
Heating exhaust valves.
The heater works best if you keep your windows closed Outside air will also enter the vehicle when the heater or
while using it. On cold days, use theHEATER or the air conditioning fan is running, unless you have the
VENT/HEAT setting with the temperature knob in the recirculation button pushed in. For more information on
red area. the recirculation button, see “Air Conditioning” earlier
If you use the engine coolant heater beforestarting your in this section.
engine (in cold weather (20°F (-8OC) or lower), your
heating system will produce warmer air faster, to heat
the passenger compartment in cold weather.

3-4
 Ventilation Tips
e Keep the hood and front airinlet free of ice, snow or
any other obstruction (such as leaves). The heater
j i.?
and defroster will work far better, reducing the
chance of fogging the inside of your windows.
0 When you enter a vehiclein cold weather, turn the
blower fan to HI for afew moments before driving.
This helps clear the intake ductsof snow and
moisture, and reduces the chance of fogging the
inside of your windows.
0 Keep the air path under the front seats clearof
objects. Thishelps air to circulatethroughout
your vehicle.
Your vehicle has air outlets in the center and on the sides Defogging and Defrosting
of your instrument panel. You can move the outlets from
side to side or up and down to direct the flow of air, or On cool, humid days, use DEFOG to keep the
close the outlets altogether. When you close an outlet, it windshield and side windows clear. Use DEFROST
will increase the flow of air coming out of any outlets to remove fog or ice from the windshield in extremely
that are open. These outlets do not completely shut off humid or cold conditions. Use DEFROST with the
airflow when in the closed position. temperature knob toward the red area and the fan control
toward HI.

3-5
Rear Window Defogger (Option) Do not attach a temporary vehicle license, tape or decals
across the defogger grid on the rear window.
If you see lines running across the rear window,
you have the rear window defogger. The lines warm
the glass. NOTICE:
To turn on the rear window
defogger, press this button Don’t use a razor bladeor something else sharp
next to the fan control knob. on the insideof the rear window.If you do, you
The rear window defogger could cutor damage the warming grid, and the
will only work if the repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
ignition switch is turned to
RUN. For best results, clear
the window of as much Audio Systems
snow or ice aspossible first. Your Delco@audio system has been designed to operate
easily and give years of listening pleasure. You will get
the most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself
with it first. Find out what your Delco system can do
and how to operate all its controls, to be sure you’re
The defoggerwill shut itself off after several minutes. If getting the most out of the advanced engineering that
you need additional warming time, press the button went into it.
again. You can turn the defogger off at any time by
pressing the button.
 Clock for Systems
Setting the without AM-FM Stereo
Automatic Tone Control
Press SET. Within five seconds, press and hold the
SEEK right arrow until the correct minute appears on
the display. Press and hold the SEEK left arrow until the
correct hour appears on the display.

Setting the Clock for Systems with

Automatic Tone Control
Press and hold HR until the correct hour appears on
the display. Press and hold MIN until the correct
minute appears on the display. To display the clock
with the ignition off, press RECALL and the time
will be displayed for a few seconds. There is an Playing the Radio
initial two-second delay before the clockgoes into VOLUME-BAL: Turn the knob clockwise to turn the
the time-set mode. radio on and counterclockwise to turn it off. To increase
the volume, turn the knob clockwise. To decrease the
volume, turn the knob counterclockwise. Display the
time with'the ignition off by pressing the
VOLUME-BAL knob. When the radio is playing, press
this button to recall the station frequency.

3-7
Finding aStation In addition to the four stations set as above, up to three
AM-FM: Press the lower knob to get AM or FM. additional stations may be preset on each band by
pressing two adjoining buttons at the same time. Just:
TUNE: Turn this knob to tune in radio stations.
1. Tune in the desired station.
SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the next higher
station and the left arrow to tuneto the next lower 2. Press SET.
station and stay there. 3. Press two adjoining buttons at the same time, within
five seconds.Whenever you press the same two
SCAN: Press both SEEK buttons to listen to a few
buttons, the station you set will return.
seconds of each radio station. SCAN will light up on the
display. Press the right arrow to tune in the next higher 4. Repeat these steps for each pair of buttons.
station and press the left arrow to tune to the next lower
station. Press VOLUME-BAL or both SEEK buttons to Setting the Tone
stop scannino BASS: Slide this lever up to increase the bass.
PUSHBUTTONS: The four numbered pushbuttons let TREB: Slide this lever up to increase the treble.
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to Slide the lever down to reduce noise with a weak or
14 stations (seven AM and seven FM). noisy station.
1. Tune in the desired station.
Adjusting the Speakers
2. Press SET.
BAL: The control behind the VOLUME-BAL knob
3. Press and hold one of the four pushbuttons, within balances the sound between the right and left speakers.
five seconds.Whenever you press that numbered
button, the station you set will return. FADE: The control behind the TUNE knob fades the
sound between the front and rear speakers.

3-8
AM-FM Stereo with CassetteTape Player Finding a Station
(Option) AM-FM: Press the lower knob to get AM or FM.
TUNE: Turn this knob to tune in radio stations.
SEEK: Press this button and the radio will tune to the
next higher or lower station and stay there.
PUSHBUTTONS: The four numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations.You can set up to
14 stations (seven AM and seven FM).
1. Tune in the desired station.
2. Press SET.
3. Press and hold one of the four pushburrons, within
five seconds. Whenever you press that numbered
Playing the Radio button, the station you set will return.
VOLUME-BAL: Turn the knob clockwise to turn the In addition to the four stations set as above, up to three
radio on and counterclockwise toturn it off. To increase additional stations may be preset on each band by
the volume, turn the knob clockwise. To decrease the pressing two adjoining buttons at the same time. Just:
volume, turn the knob counterclockwise. 1. Tune in the desired station.
RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by 2. Press SET.
pressing the RECALL knob. When the radio is playing,
press this button to recall the station frequency. 3. Press two adjoining buttons at the same time,
within five seconds.Whenever you press the same
two buttons, the station you set will return.
4. Repeat these steps for each pair of buttons.

3-9
PSCAN: Press both SEEK buttons to scan through each Playing a CassetteTape
of the preset stations. The system will scan through and Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are
play each preset station stored on your pushbuttons for a 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer than
few seconds. Press either SEEK button or RECALL to that are so thin they may not work well in this player.
stop scanning through the preset stations.
Once the tape is playing, use the knobs for VOLUME,
Setting the Tone FADE and BAL just as you do for the radio.
BASS: Slide this lever up to increase the bass. FWD: Press the SEEK right arrow to advance the
TREB: Slide this lever up to increase the treble. cassette tape. Press the SEEK left arrow to stop
Slide the lever down to reduce noise with a weak forwarding the tape.
or noisy station. REV: Press the SEEK left arrow to reverse the
cassette tape. Press the SEEK right arrow to stop
Adjusting the Speakers reversing the tape.
BAL: The control behind the VOLUME-BAL knob RECALL: Press this button to switch tape sides.
balances the sound between the right and left speakers.
EJECT: Press this button to remove the tape or stopthe
FADE: The control behind the TUNE knob fades the tape and play the radio.
sound between the front and rear speakers.
CLN: This message may appear on the display. If it
does, your cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It
will still play tapes, but you should clean it as soon as
possible to prevent damage to your tapes and player. See
“Care of Your Cassette Tape Player’’ in the Index. After
you clean the player, press and hold EJECT for five
seconds to reset the CLN indicator. The radio will
display --- to show the indicator was reset.

3-10
AM-FM Stereo with CassetteTape and SCV This is the Speed-Compensated-Volume (SCV)
Automatic Tone Control (Option) knob. Move the control ring behind the PWR-VOL
knob clockwise to adjust the SCV. Set the volume at the
desired level. As you drive, the SCV automatically
increases the volume, as necessary, to overcome road
and wind noise at any particular speed. The volume
should always sound the same. Each clockwise position
on the control ring allows for more compensation at a
faster rate.

Finding a Station
AM-FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FMl
and FM2. The display will show your selection.
TUNE: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Rotate the knob clockwise to increase
Playing the Radio
frequency and counterclockwise to decrease frequency.
PWR-VOL: Press this knob to turn the system on and When finished tuning, press the knob again to return it
off. Turn this control clockwise to increase the volume to its stored position.
and counterclockwise to decrease the volume. The faster
SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the next
the PWR-VOL knob is rotated, the quicker the volume
higher station and the left arrow to tune to the next
is increased or decreased.
lower station and stay there, The sound will mute
RECALL: Press this button to switch between the clock while seeking.
and the radio station frequency displayed when the radio
is on. Also, press this button to display the time when
the ignition is off.

3-11
 -~ ~ - ~ - ~ . ~ ~ - ~~
--__
__ ~- ~ - ~ -~ - ~ __ ~ -~

SCAN: Press and hold SEEK for two seconds until 3. Press AUTO TONE to select the setting you prefer.
SCAN appears on the display. SCAN allows you to 4. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons.
listen to stations for a few seconds. The receiver will
continue to scan and momentarily stop at each station 5. The sound will mute. When it returns, release the
until you press the button again. The sound will mute button. Whenever you press that numbered button, the
while scanning. station you set will return andthe tone you selected
will be automaticallyselected for that button.
AUTO TONE: Press this button to select among the
five preset equalization settings and tailor the sound to P.SCAN: The preset scan button lets you scan through
the music or voice being heard. Each time you press the your favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons. Select
button, the selection will switch to one of the preset either the AM, FMl or FM2mode and then press
settings of CLASSIC, NEWS, ROCK, POP or JAZZ. To PSCAN. It will scan through each station stored on your
return to the manual mode, press and release this button pushbuttons and stop for afew seconds before
until MAN appears on the display. This will return the continuing to scan through all of the pushbuttons. Press
tone adjustment to the TREB and BASS controls. If a .P.SCANagain or one of the pushbuttons to stop
TREB or BASS control is rotated, the AUTO TONE scanning to listen to a specific preset station. P.SCAN
setting will change to MAN. will light up on the display while in this mode. If one of
the stations stored on a pushbutton is tooweak for the
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let location you are in, the radio display will show the
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to channel number (PI-P6) for several seconds before
18 stations (six AM, six FMl and six FM2). advancing to the next preset station.
1. Press AM-FM to.select the band.
2. Tune in the desired station by pressing TUNE or the
SEEK left or right arrows.

3-12
Setting the Tone Playing a Cassette Tape
BASS: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are
stored position.Turn the knob clockwise to increase the 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer than
bass and counterclockwise to decreasethe bass. When that are so thin they may not work well in this player.
the BASS control is rotated, the AUTO TONE setting To load a cassette tape with the ignition off, press
will change to MAN. Push the knob back in to its stored EJECT or RECALL. Then, insert the cassette tape.
position when done. If the ignition is on but the radio is off, the tape will
TREB: Press lightly on the TREB knob to release it begin playing.
from its stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to The player automatically senses if the cassette tape
increase the treble and counterclockwise to decrease is metal or Cr02 and adjusts forbest playback sound.
the treble. When the TREB control is rotated, the For metal tapes, the double-D symbol will appear on
AUTO TONE setting will change to MAN. Push the the display.
knob back in to its stored position when done.
Once the tape is playing, use the VOL, BAL, FADE,
Adjusting the Speakers TREB and BASS controls justas you do for the radio.
BAL: Press this button to remove the control from its The tape symbol and a direction arrow will be on the
stored position. Turn the control clockwise to adjust display whenever a tape is being played. Anytime a tape
sound to the right speakers and counterclockwise to is inserted, the top side is selected for play first.
adjust sound to the left speakers. Press the button again PREV (1): Press the PREV or the SEEK left arrow to
to return BAL to its stored position. search for the previous selection. A minimum
FADE: Press this button to remove the control from its three-second blank gap is required for the player to stop
stored position. Turn the control clockwise to adjust the at the beginning of the selection. Thetape direction
sound to the front and counterclockwise for rear arrow will blink during the SEEK operation.
speakers. Press the button again to return FADE to its PROG (2): Press this button to switch from one side of
stored position. the tape to the other.

3-13
NEXT (3): Press NEXT or the SEEK right arrow to AM-FM: Press this button to switch from a tape to
search for the next selection. A minimum three-second the radio.
blank gap is required for the player to stopat the TAPE AUX: Press this button to return to the tape
beginning of the selection. Thetape direction arrow player. The lighted arrow will appear and show the
will blink during the SEEK operation. direction of play when a tape is in the active mode.
REV (4): Press this button to rapidly reverse the tape to EJECT Press this buttonto remove the tape. The radio
the beginning of the cassette reel or until you press REV will now play. EJECTcan be used with either the ignition
again. Theradio will play the last selected station while or radio off. To load a cassette tape with the ignitionor
reversing the tape. The tape direction arrow will blink radio off, press EJECT before loading thecassette.
during REV operation.
CLN: This message may appear on the display. If it
00 (5): Press this button to reduce cassette tape noise. does, your cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It
The double-D symbol will appear on the display while will still play tapes, but you should clean it as soon as
the player is in this mode. possible to prevent damage to your tapes and player. See
Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license “Care of Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby you clean the player, press and hold EJECT for five
and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby seconds to reset the CLN indicator. The radio will
Laboratories Licensing Corporation. display --- to show the indicator was reset.
FWD (6): Press this button to rapidly forward the tape
to the end of the cassette reel ‘oruntil you press FWD
again. Theradio will play the last selected station while
forwarding the tape. The tape direction arrow will blink
during FWD operation.

3-14
CD Adapter Kits To load a CD into the player, hold the disc with the
label side up and insert it carefully into the player
Although this is not a recommended practice, it is possible
(approximately half way). The disc will automatically
to use a CD adapter kit with your cassette tape player.
be pulled into the player. If the radio is off and the
The adapter kit cassette should begin playing like a ignition is on when a CD is inserted, the radio will turn
regular audio cassette tape once inserted. If the cassette on and begin playing the CD. It is possible to load and
immediately ejects, turn the radio off, turn the ignition on unload CD's with the ignition off. To load a disc with
and press and hold the TAPE AUX buttonuntil the tape the ignition off, press the EJECT button on the remote
icon flashes on the display. Insert theadapter cassette player and then insert the disc. To remove the disc, press
again. It will power up the radio and begin playing. the EJECT button and remove the disc from the player.
This override routine will remain active until the EJECT A disc that has been ejected but is still sitting in the
button is pressed. remote CD player will be pulled back into the player
after approximately 30 seconds. Thisprotects the disc
Playing a Compact Discin the Single Remote and player from damage. The disc will not start playing.
Disc Player To remove the disc, press the EJECT button and remove
the disc from the player.
All of the compact disc functions are controlled by the
radio buttons except for EJECT. When a disc is in the
player, a CD symbol will appear on the display. When a
disc is playing, the letters CD will appear next to the CD
symbol in the bottom left corner. The track number will
also be displayed.

If you have this option, you can play one compact disc
(CD) at a time.

3-15
If the disc comes back out and ERR appears on the PROG (2): This button is active only when you have
display, it could be that: the 12-disc changer.
0 The disc is upside down. NEXT (3): Press this button to advance to the next track
0 It is dirty, scratched or wet. on the disc.

There’s too much moisture in the air. (Wait about an

REV (4): Press and hold this button to quickly reverse
within a track (song). As the CD reverses, elapsed time
hour and try again.)
will be displayed to help you find the correct passage.
You are driving on a very rough road.
FWD (6): Press and hold this button to quickly advance
Please contact your dealer if any error recurs or cannot within a track (song). As the CD advances,elapsed time
be corrected. will be displayed to help you find the correct passage.
TAPE AUX: With a discloaded in the player and the RANDOM: Press P.SCAN to enter the random play
radio playing, press this button once to play the compact mode. RANDOM will appear on the display. While in
disc. To return to playing the radio, press AM-FM. If this mode, the tracks on the discs will be played in
both a cassettetape and CD are loaded, press TAPE random order. If you press SEEK, PREV or NEXT
AUX to switch between the tape and compact disc. while in the random mode, the PREV or NEXT track
SEEK: Press the left arrow while playing a CD to go will be scanned randomly. Press P.SCAN again to turn
back to the start of the current track. It will go back to off RANDOM and return to normal operation.
the current track if more than eight seconds have played. EJECT: Press this button on the remote player to eject
Press theleft arrow again to go toprevious tracks. Press a compact disc.
the right arrow to go to the next higher track on the disc.
RECALL: Press this button to see what track is
PREV (1): Press this button to go back to the start of the currently playing. Press RECALL again within five
current track if more than eight seconds have played. seconds to see how long the track has been playing.
Press PREV again togo to the previous track on the disc. When a new track starts to play, the track number will
also appear. Press RECALL a third time and the time of
day will be displayed.
3-16
AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player SCV This is the Speed-Compensated-Volume (SCV)
and Automatic Tone Control (Option) knob. Move the control ring behind the PWR-VOL
knob clockwise to adjust the SCV. Set the volume at the
desired level. As you drive, the SCV automatically
increases the volume, as necessary, to overcome road
and wind noise at any particular speed. Thevolume
should always sound the same. Each clockwise position
on the control ring allows for more compensation at a
faster rate.
Finding a Station
AM-FM: Press this button to switch between AM,
FM 1 and FM2.The display will show your selection.
TUNE: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Rotate theknob clockwise to increase
Playing the Radio
frequency and counterclockwise to decrease frequency.
PWR-VOL: Press this knob to turn the system on and When finished tuning, press the knob again to return it
off. Turn this control clockwise to increase the volume to its stored position.
and counterclockwise to decrease the volume. The faster
the PWR-VOL knob is rotated, the quicker the volume SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the next higher
station and the left arrow to tune to the next lower
is increased or decreased.
station and stay there. There will be no sound when
RECALL: Press this button to switch between the clock using the SEEK feature.
and the radio station frequency displayed when the radio
is on. Also, press this button to display the time when
the ignition is off.

3-17
 -- - .~ I_--

SCAN: Press and hold SEEK for two seconds until P.SCAN: The preset scan button lets you scan through
SCAN appears on the display. SCAN allows you to your favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons. Select
listen to stations for a few seconds. The receiver will either the AM, FMl or FM2 mode and then press
continue toscan and momentarily stop at each station P.SCAN. It will scan through each station stored on your
until you press the button again. There will be no sound pushbuttons and stop fora few seconds before
when using the SCAN feature. continuing to scan through all of the pushbuttons. Press
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let P.SCAN again or one of the pushbuttons to stop
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to scanning to listen to a specific stored station. P.SCAN
18 stations (six AM, six FMl and six FM2). will light up on the display while in this mode. If one of
the stations stored on a pushbutton is too weak for the
1. Press AM-FM to select the band. location you are in, the radio display will show the
2. Tune in the desired station by pressing TUNE or the channel number (P 1-P6) for several seconds before
SEEK left or right arrows. advancing to the next preset station.
3. Press AUTO TONE to select the setting you prefer. Setting the Tone
4. Press and hold one of the four pushbuttons. AUTO TONE: Press this button to select among the
5. The sound will mute. When it returns, release the five preset equalization settings and tailor the sound to
button. Whenever you press that numberedbutton, the the music or voice being heard. Each time you press the
station you set will return and the tone you selected button, the selection will switch to one of the preset
will be automaticallyselected for that button. settings of CLASSIC, NEWS, ROCK, POP or JAZZ.
The display will show which mode the receiver is in. To
return to the manual mode, press and release this button
until MAN appears on the display. This will return the
tone adjustment to the TREB and BASS controls. When
a TREB or BASS control is rotated, tone is
automatically set to MAN.

3-18
BASS: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its Playing a Compact Disc
stored position.Turn the knob clockwise to increase the PWR: Press this knob to turn the system on. (Please
bass and counterclockwise to decrease the bass. When note that you can also turn the system on when
the BASS control is rotated, the AUTO TONE setting you insert a compact disc intothe player with the
will change to MAN. Push the knob back in to its stored ignition on.)
position when done.
Insert a disc partway into the slot, labelside up. The
TREB: Press lightly on the TREB knob to releaseit player will pull it in. Wait a few seconds and the disc
from its stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to should play. CD and a CD symbol will also appearon
increase the treble and counterclockwise to decrease the the display. Anytime you are playing a CD, the letters
treble. When the TREB control is rotated, the AUTO CD will be next to the CD symbol.
TONE settingwill change to MAN. Push the knob back
in to its stored position when done. If the disc comesback out and ERR appears on the
display, it could be that:
Adjusting the Speakers
You are driving on a very rough road. (The disc
BAL: Press this button to remove the control from its should play when the road gets smoother.)
stored position. Turn the control clockwiseto adjust
0 The disc is upside down.
sound to the right speakers and counterclockwise to
adjust sound to the left speakers. Press the button again 0 It is dirty, scratched or wet.
to return BAL to its stored position. 0 It is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour and
FADE: Press this button to remove the control from its try again.)
stored position. Turn the control clockwiseto adjust the 0 The disc player is very hot.
sound to the front and counterclockwise forrear
speakers. Press the button again to return FADE to its Press RECALL t.o make ERR go off the display.
stored position.

3-19
RECALL: Press this button to see what track is playing. FWD (6): Press and hold this button to advance rapidly
Press it again within five seconds to seehow long the within a track. You will hear the disc selection play at
CD has been playing that track. Elapsed time is high speed while you press the FWD button. This allows
displayed in minutes and tenths of a second. The track you to listen and find out when the disc is at the desired
number will also appear when a new track begins to selection. Release FWD to resume playing.
play. Press RECALL again to return to the time display. AM-FM: While in the CD mode, press this button to
PREV (1): Press PREV or the SEEK left arrow to stop playing the CD and play the radio. The CD symbol
search for the previous selection. If you hold this button will still display but the word CD will be replaced with
or press it more than once, the disc will advance further. either AM, FMI or FM2. (If the radio is turned off, the
Sound is muted in thismode. disc stays in the player and will resume playing at the
point where it stopped.)
RDM (2): Press this button to play the tracks on the disc
in random (instead of 1,2, 3. . .) order. While in the CD AUX: To switch between the player and the radio
RDM mode, RANDOM appears on the display. Press when a disc is playing, press the AM-FM button. To
RDM again to return to normal play. return to the player, press CD AUX. When a disc is
NEXT (3): Press NEXT or the SEEK right arrow to
playing, the letters CD and the CD symbol will appear
search for the next selection. If you hold this button or on the display. (If the radio is turned off, the disc stays
in the player and will resume playing at the point where
press it more than once, the disc will advance further.
The next track number will appear on the display. Sound it stopped.)
is muted in this mode. EJECT: Press this button to eject the disc from the
player and play the radio. When the same or a new disc
REV (4): Press and hold REV to return rapidly to a
is inserted, the disc will start playing on track one. If a
favorite passage. You will hear the disc selection play at
compact disc is left sitting in the opening for more than
high speed while you press the REV button. This allows
you to listen and find out when the disc is at thedesired a few seconds, the player will pull the CD back in. The
selection. Release REV to resume playing. radio will continue playing. When the ignition is off,
press this button to load a CD.
Theft-Deterrent Feature 2. Turn the ignition to the ACCESSORY or
RUN position.
THEFTLOCK is designed to discourage theft of your
TM

radio. It works by using a secret codeto disable all radio 3. Turn the radio off.
functions whenever battery power is removed. 4. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down
The THEFTLOCK feature forthe radio may be used or until --- shows on the display. Next you will use the
ignored. If ignored, the system plays normally and the secret code number which you have written down.
radio is not protected by the feature. If THEFTLOCK is 5. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
activated, your radio will not operate if stolen.
6. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree
When THEFTLOCK is activated, the radio will display with your code.
LOC to indicate a locked condition anytime battery
power is removed. If your battery loses power for any 7. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree
reason, you must unlock the radio with the secret code with your code.
before it will operate. 8. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written down.
Activating the Theft-Deterrent Feature The display will show REP to let you know that you
The instructions which follow, explain how to enter your need to repeat Steps 5 through 7 to confirm your
secret code to activate the THEFTLOCK system. It is secret code.
recommended that you read through all nine steps 9. Press AM-FM and this time the display will show
before starting the procedure. SEC to let you know that your radio is secure. The
NOTE: If you allow more than 15 seconds to elapse indicator by the volume control will begin flashing
between any steps, the radio automatically revertsto when the ignition is turned off.
time and you must start the procedure overat Step 4.
1. Write down any three or four-digit number from
000 to 1999 and keep it in a safe place setmate from
the vehicle.
3-21
Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent Feature After Disabling theTheft-Deterrent Feature
a Power Loss Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than
Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than 15 seconds between steps:
15 seconds between steps: 1. Turn the ignitionto the ACCESSORY or RUN position.
1. LOC appears when the ignition is on. 2. Turn the radio off.
2. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display. 3. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down
until SEC shows on the display.
3. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree
with your code. 4. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
4. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree 5. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree
with your code. with your code.
6. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree
5. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
with your code.
code matches the secret code you have written down.
The display will show SEC, indicating the radio is 7. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
now operable and secure. code matches the secret code you have written down.
The display will show ---,indicating that the radio is
If you enter the wrong code eight times, INOP will no longer secured.
appear on the display. You will have to wait an hour
with the ignition on before you can try again. When If the code entered is incorrect, SEC will appear on the
you try again, you will only have three chances to enter display. The radio will remain secured until the correct
the correct code before INOP appears. code is entered.
If you lose or forget your code, contactyour dealer. When battery power is disconnected from a secured
radio, the radio won’t turn on and LOC will appear on
the display.
To unlock a secured radio, see “Unlocking the
Theft-Deterrent Feature After a Power Loss” earlier
in this section.
3-22
Understanding Radio Reception To help avoid hearing loss or damage:
Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting.
FM Stereo
Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably
FM stereo will give you the best sound. But FM signals and clearly.
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall
buildings or hillscan interfere with FM signals, causing
the sound to come and go. NOTICE:
AM
Before you add any sound equipment to your
The range for most AM stations is greaterthan for FM, --
vehicle like a tape player, CB radio, mobile
especially at night. The longer range, however, can
cause stations to interferewith each other. AM can pick
--
telephone or two-way radio be sure you can
up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try add what you want. If you can, it's veryimportant
reducing the treble toreduce this noise if you ever get it. to do itproperly. Addedsound equipment may
interfere with the operation of your vehicle's
Tips About Your Audio System engine, Delcoradio or other systems, and even
Hearing damage from loud noise is almostundetectable damage them. Your vehicle's systems may
until it is too late.Your hearing can adapt to higher interfere with the operation of sound equipment
volumes of sound. Sound that seems normal can be loud that has been added improperly.
and harmful to your hearing. Take precautions by So, before adding sound equipment, check with
adjusting the volume control on your radio to a safe your dealer and be sure to check Federal rules
sound level before your hearing adapts to it. covering mobile radio andtelephone units.

3-23
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type
cleaner which usesa cassette with a fabric belt to clean the
A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause
tape head. This typeof cleaning cassette will not eject. It
reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes ora damaged may not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner.
mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their
cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight and Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality may
extreme heat. If they aren’t, they may not operate degrade over time. Always make sure that the cassette
properly or may cause failure of the tape player. tape is in good condition before you have your tape
player serviced.
Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every
50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLN to indicate Care of Your Compact Discs
that you have used your tape player for 50 hours without Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases
resetting the tape clean timer.If you notice a reduction in or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight
sound quality, trya known good cassette to see if the tape and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen a
or the tape player is atfault. If this other cassette has no clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution and
improvement in sound quality, cleanthe tape player. clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
Cleaning may be done with a scrubbing action, Be sure never to touch the signal surface when handling
non-abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges orthe
the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn. It edge of the hole and the outer edge.
is normal for the cassette to eject while cleaning because
your unit is equipped with a cut tape feature. To Fixed Mast Antenna
temporarily override this feature (forone insertion), turn The fixed mast antenna can withstand most vehicle
the radio off and press and hold TAPE AUX until the washes without being damaged. If the mast should ever
tape symbol flashes on the display, then insert the become slightly bent, you can straighten it out by hand.
cassette again. Insert the cassette at least three times to If the mast is badly bent, as it might be by vandals, you
ensure thorough cleaning. A scrubbing action cleaning should replace it.
cassette is available through your GM dealer. Check every once in a while to be sure the mast is still
tightened to the cowl.
3-24
 Section 4 Your Driving and the Road

Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. (See “Safety Belts” in the Index.)
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Assume that pedestrians or otherdrivers are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might
do. Be ready for their mistakes.
Rear-end collisions are aboutthe most preventable of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough
following distance.It’s the best defensive driving
maneuver, in both city and rural driving. You never
Here you’ll find information about driving on different know when the vehicle in front of you is going to brake
kinds of roads and in varying weather conditions. We’ve or turn suddenly.
also included many other useful tips on driving.

4-1
Drunken Driving The obvious way to solve this highway safety problem
is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive. But
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving what if people do? How much is “too much” if the
is a national tragedy. It’s the number one contributor to driver plans to drive? It’s a lot less than many might
the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims think. Although it depends on each person and situation,
every year. here is some general information on the problem.
Alcohol affects fourthings that anyone needs to drive The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
a vehicle: who is drinking depends upon four things:
Judgment The amount of alcohol consumed
0 Muscular Coordination 0 The drinker’s body weight
Vision 0 The amount of food that is consumed before and
0 Attentiveness. during drinking
Police records show that almost half of all motor 0 The length of time it has taken the drinker to
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases, consume the alcohol.
these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking According to the American Medical Association, a
and driving. In recent years, some 18,000 annual motor 180-lb. (82 kg) person who drinks three 12-ounce
vehicle-related deaths have been associated with the use (355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a
of alcohol, with more than 300,000 people injured. BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
Many adults -- by some estimates, nearly half the same BAC by drinking three 4-ounce ( 120 ml) glasses
adult population -- choose never to drink alcohol, so of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1- 1/2 ounces
they never drive afterdrinking. For persons under 2 1, (45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey, gin or vodka.
it’s against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasons for these laws.

4-2
 Since alcoholis carried in body water, this means that a
woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a
man of her same body weight when each has the same
number of drinks.
The law in many U.S. states sets the legal limit at a BAC
of 0.10 percent. In a growing number of U.S. states, and
throughout Canada, the limit is 0.08 percent. In some
other countries,it’s even lower. The BAC limit for all
commercial drivers in the United States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to six
drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we’ve seen, it
depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and how
quickly the person drinks them.
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC
of 0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
It’s the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if 0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person who increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
consumes food just before or during drinking will have a 0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
somewhat lower BAC level. 0.06 percent has doubled his or herchance of having a
collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally have
this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a
a lower relative percentage of body water than men.
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!

4-3
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I’ll be careful” isn’t the
A
I
CAUTION:
right answer. What if there’s an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street? Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness and
to react quickly enough to avoid the collision. judgment can be affectedby even a small amount
--
of alcohol. You can have a serious or even
There’s something else about drinkingand driving that
many people don’t know. Medical research shows that --
fatal collision if you drive after drinking.
alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries Please don’t drink and drive or ride with a driver
worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord or who has‘been drinking. Ride home in a cab; orif
heart. This means that when anyone who has been you’re with a group, designate a driver whowill
drinking -- driver or passenger-- is in a crash, that not drink.
person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not been drinking.

4-4
Control of a Vehicle Braking
You have three systems that make your vehicle go where Braking action involves perception time and
you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering and reaction time.
the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
at the places where the tires meet the road. That’s perception tinw. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That’s reuction time.
Average reaction tinne is about 3/4 of a second. But
that’s only an average. It might be less with one
driver and as long as two orthree seconds or more with
another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination
and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and
frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle
moving at 60 mph (1 00 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m).
That could be a lot of distance in an emergency, so
keeping enough space between your vehicle and others
is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road (whether it’s pavement or
gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire
tread; and the condition of your brakes.

Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow or ice, it’s

easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires
and road can provide. That means you can lose control
of your vehicle.
4-5
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in Anti-Lock Brakes
spurts -- heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking -- rather than keeping pace with traffic. This Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes (ABS). ABS is an
is a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool advanced electronic braking system that will help
between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much prevent a braking skid.
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace When you start your hgine and begin to drive away,
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances, your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You may
you will eliminate alot of unnecessary braking. That hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test
means better braking and longer brake life. is going on. This is normal.
If your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brake If there’s a problem with the
normally but don’t pump your brakes. If you do, the anti-lock brake system, this
pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine warning light will stay on,
stops, you will still have some power brake assist. But See “Anti-Lock Brake’
you will use it when you brake. Once the power assist is System Warning Light” in
used up, it may take longer tostop and the brake pedal the Index.
will be harder to push. ANTI -
LOCK

4-6
 The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure faster

1 than any driver could. The computer is programmed to

make the mostof available tire and roadconditions.

Here's how anti-lock works. Let's say the road is wet.

You're driving safely. Suddenly an animal jumps out in
front of you.
You slam on the brakes. Here's what happens with ABS. You can steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If one As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on
of the wheels is about to stoprolling, the computer will wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.
separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at the
rear wheels.

4-7
Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change the time you need Steering
to get your foot up tothe brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close tothe vehicle in Power Steering
front of you, you won’t have time to apply your brakes
if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave If you lose power steering assist because the engine
enough room up ahead to stop, even though you have stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
anti-lock brakes. it will take much more effort.

Using Anti-Lock Steering Tips

Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down Driving on Curves
and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel the brakes It’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
vibrate, or you may notice some noise, but this is
normal. On vehicles with four-wheel drive, your A lot of the “driver lost control’’ accidents mentioned on
anti-lock brakes work at all times -- whether you are in the news happen on curves. Here’s why:
two-wheel drive orfour-wheel drive. Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves. The
Braking in Emergencies traction of the tires against the road surface makes it
Use your anti-lock braking system when you need to. possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn
With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same the front wheels. If there’s no traction, inertia will keep
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more the vehicle going in the same direction. If you’ve ever
than even the very best braking. tried to steer avehicle on wet ice, you’ll understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you’re
in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.

4-8
Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve. Then you Steering in Emergencies
suddenly accelerate. Both control systems -- steering and
accelemtion -- have to do their work where the tires meet There are times when steering can be more ef’tective
the road. Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too than braking. For example, you come over a hill and
much of those places. You can lose control. find a truck stopped in your lane, or a carsuddenly
pulls out from nowhere, or a child dartsout from
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on the between parked cars and stops right in front of you.
accelerat.orpedal, steer the vehicle the way you want it You can avoid these problems by braking -- if you
to go, and slow down. can stop in time. But sometimes you can’t; there isn’t
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should room. That’s the time for evasive action -- steering
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds are around the problem.
based o n good weather and road conditions. Under less Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies
favorable conditions you’ll want to go slower. like these. First apply your brakes. (See ”Braking in
I f you need to reduce your speed as you approach a Emergencies” earlier in this section.) It is better to
curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front remove as much speed as you can from a possible
wheels are straight ahead. collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left
or right depending on the spacc available.
Try to adjust your speed s o you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until y o u are o u t of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightuway.

4-9
 Off-Road Recovery
You may find sometime that your right wheels have
dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while
you’re driving.

I OFF-ROADRECOVERY / ..-

An emergency like this requires close attention and a

quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can
turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you have to act fast, steerquickly, and
just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have
avoided the object. If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
The h c t that such emergency situations are always accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at so that your vehicle straddles theedge of the pavement.
all times and wear safety belts properly. You can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarter turn
until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge. Then
turn your steering wheel to go straight down the roadway.

4-10
Passing 0 Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you’re awaiting an opportunity. For one
The driver of a vehicle about t o pass another 011 a thing, following too closely reduces your area of
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment, vision, especially if you’re following a larger
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then goes vehicle. Also, you won’t have adequate space if
back into the right lane again. A siInple maneuver’? the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane back a reasonable distance.
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the 0 When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming start to accelerate but stay i n the right lane and don’t
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error i n get too close. Time your ~ m v so e you will be
judgment, o r a briet’ surrender to frustration or anger can increasing speed as the time comes t o move into the
suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have a
worst of all traffic accidents -- the head-on collision. “running start” that more than makes up for the
So here ate some tips for passing: distance you would lose by dropping back. And if
something happens to cause you to cancel your pass,
0 “Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides and you need only slow down and drop back again and
to crossroads for situations that might affect your wait for anotheropportunity.
passing patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever
about making a successful pass, wait for a better time. 0 If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait
your turn. But take care that someone isn’t trying to
0 Watch for traffic signs, pavement nlarkings and lines. pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle.
If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a Remember to glance over your shoulder and check
turn or an intersection, delay your pass. A broken the blind spot.
center line usually indicates it’s all right to pass
(providing the load ahead is clear). Never cross a solid
line on you1 side of the lane or a double solid line,
even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic.

4-11
 Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder and Loss of Control
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough Let’s review what driving experts say about what
ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your happens when the three control systems (brakes, steering
inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal and acceleration) don’t have enough friction where the
and move back into the right lane. (Remember that if tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked.
your right outside mirror is convex, the vehicle you In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to
just passed may seem t o be farther away from you steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of
than it really is.) less danger.
Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time
on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the Skidding
next vehicle. In a skid, adriver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may care suited to existing conditions, and by not
be slowing down or starting to turn. “overdriving” those conditions. But skids are always
possible.
I f you’re being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
can ease a little to the right. three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering i n a curve causes tires to slip and
lose cornering force. And i n the acceleration skid, too
much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.

4-12
A cornering skid and an acceleration skid are best Driving Guidelines
handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal
If your vehicle starts to slide, easeyour foot off the Off-Road Driving withYour
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle
vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough, your This off-road guide is for vehicles that have
vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a four-wheel drive.
second skid if it occurs.
Also. see "Anti-Lock Brakes" in the Index.
Of course, traction is reduced when water. snow, ice.
gravel or other material is on the road. For safety. you'll
want to slow down and adjust your driving to these
conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and Off-road driving can be great fun. But it does have
vehicle control more limited. some definite hazards. The greatest of these is the
While driving o n a surface with reduced traction, try terrain itself.
your best to avoid sudden steering. acceleration or "Off-roading" means you've left the great North
braking (including engine braking by shifting to a lower American road system behind. Traffic lanes aren't
gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires t o marked. Curves aren't banked. There are no road signs.
slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery until Surfaces can be slippery. rough, uphill or downhill. In
your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning short. you've gone right back to nature.
clues -- such as enough water, ice or packed snow o n
the road to make a "mirrored surface" -- and slow Off-road driving involves some new skills. And that's
down when you have any doubt. why it's very important that you read this guide. You'll
find many driving tips and suggestions. These will help
Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps make your off-road driving safer and more enjoyable.
avoid only the braking skid.

4-13
Before You Go Off-Roading
There are some things to do before you go out. For
example, be sure to have all necessary maintenance and
service work done. Check to make sure all underbody 0 Cargo on the load floor piled higher than
shields (if so equipped) are properly attached. Be sure ~

the seatbacks canbe thrown forward

you read all the information about your four-wheel-drive during a sudden stop. Yon or your
vehicle in this manual. Is there enough fuel? Is the spare
passengers could be injured. Keep cargo
tire fully inflated? Are the fluid levels up where they
should be? What are the local laws that applyto below the tapof the seatbacks.
off-roading where you’ll be driving? If you don’t know,
0 Unsecured cargo on the load floor can
you should check with law enforcement people in the be tossed about when driving over rough
area. Will you be on someone’s private land? If so, be terrain. You or your passengers can
sure to get the necessary permission. be struck by flying objects. Secure the
cargo properly.
Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road Driving 0 Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle’s
There are some important things to remember about center of gravity, makingit more likely to
how to load your vehicle. roll over. You can be seriously or fatally
The heaviest things should be on the load floor and injured if the vehicle rolls over. Put heavy
forward of your rear axle. Put heavier items as far loads inside the cargo area, not on the roof.
forward as you can. Keep cargo in the cargo area as far forward
and low as possible.
0 Be sure the load is secured properly, so driving on
the off-road terrain doesn’t toss things around.
You’ll find other important information in this manual.
See “Vehicle L,oading.” “1,uggage Carrier” and “Tires”
in the Index.

4-14
Environmental Concerns Traveling to Remote Areas
Off-road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying It makes sense to plan your trip, especially when going
recreation. However, it also raises environmental t o a remote area. Know the terrain and plan your route.
concerns. GM recognizes these concerns and urges You are much less likely to get bad surprises. Get
every off-roader to follow these basic rules for accurate maps of trails and terrain. Try to learn of any
protecting the environment: blocked or closed roads.
0 Always use established trails, roads and areas that It's also a good idea t o travel with at least one other
have been specially set aside for public off-road vehicle. If something happens to one of them, the other
recreational driving; obey a l l posted regulations. can help quickly.
0 Avoid any driving practice that could damage the Does your vehicle have a winch'? If so, be sure to read
environment -- shrubs, flowers,trees, grasses -- or the winch instructions. In a remote area, a winch can be
disturb wildlife (this includes wheel-spinning, handy if you get stuck. But you'll want to know how to
breaking down trees or unnecessary driving through use it properly.
streams or oversoft ground).
Getting Familiar withOff-Road Driving
0 Always carry a litter bag -- make sure all refuse is
removed from any campsite before leaving. It's a good idea to practice in an area that's safe and
close to home before you go into the wilderness.
0 Take extreme care with open fires (where permitted), Off-road driving does require some new and different
camp stoves and lanterns. driving skills. Here's what we mean.
0 Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other Tune your senses to different kinds of signals. Your
combustible materials that could catch fire from the eyes, for example, need to constantly sweep the terrain
heat of the vehicle's exhaust system. for unexpected obstacles. Your ears need to listen for
unusual tire or engine sounds. With your arms, hands,
.feet and body, you'll need to respond to vibrations and
vehicle bounce.

4-15
Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful Scanning the Terrain
off-road driving. One of the best ways to control your
vehicle is to control your speed. Here are some things to Off-road driving can take you over many different
keep i n mind. At higher speeds: kinds of terrain. You need to be familiar with the
terrain and its many different features. Here are some
you approach things faster and YOLI have less time to things to consider.
scan the terrain for obstacles.
SurJirce Conditions. Off-roading can take you over
yo~rhave less time to react. hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud,
you have rnore vehicle bounce when you drive snow or ice. Each of these surfaces affects the steering,
over obstacles. acceleration and braking of your vehicle in different
ways. Depending upon the kind of surface you are
you'll need more distance for braking, especially on, you may experience slipping, sliding, wheel
since you're on an unpaved surface. spinning, delayed acceleration, poor traction and
longer braking distances.
SLq%zce Ohstucles. Unseen or hidden obstacles can
be hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut or bump can
startle you if you're not prepared for them. Often these
When you're driving off-road, bouncingand obstacles are hidden by grass, bushes, snow or even
quick changes in direction can easily throw you the rise and fall of the terrain itself. Here are some
out of position. This could cause you
to lose things to consider:
control and crash.So, whether you're drivingon Is the path ahead clear?
or off the road, you and your passengers should
0 Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead?
wear safety belts.
Does the travel take you uphill or downhill? (There's
more discussion of these subjects later.)
Will you have to stop suddenly or change
direction quickly?
4-16
When you drive over obstacles orrough terrain, keep a Driving on Off-Road Hills
firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs or other
Off-road driving often takes you up, down or across a
surface features can jerk the wheel out of your hands if
hill. Driving safely on hills requires good judgment and
you’re not prepared.
an understanding of what your vehicle can and can’t do.
When you drive over bumps, rocks, or other obstacles, There are some hills that simply can’t be driven, no
your wheels can leave the ground. If this happens, even matter how well built the vehicle.
with one or two wheels, you can’t control the vehicle as
well or at all.
Because you will be o n an unpaved surface, it’s
especially important to avoid sudden acceleration,
sudden turns or sudden braking. Many hills are simplytoo steep for any vehicle. If
In a way, off-road driving requires a different kind of you drive up them, you will stall. If you drive
alertness from driving on paved roads and highways. down them, you can’t control your speed. If you
There are no road signs, posted speed limits or signal drive across them, you will roll over. You could be
lights. You have to use your own good judgment about seriously injuredor killed. If you have any doubt
what is safe and what isn’t. about the steepness,don’t drive the hill.
Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any
road. And this is certainly true for off-road driving. At
the very time you need special alertness and driving
skills, your reflexes, perceptions and judgment can be
affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You could
have a serious -- or even fatal -- accident if you drink
and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking.
See “Drunken Driving” in the Index.

-- 4-17
Approaching a Hill 0 Are there obstructions on the hill that can block your
path (boulders, trees, logs or ruts)?
When you approach a hill, you need to decide if it's one
of those hills that's just too steep to climb, descend or What's beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, an
cross. Steepness can be hard to judge. On a very small embankment, a drop-off, a fence? Get out and walk the
hill, for example, there may be a smooth,constant hill if you don't know. It's the smart way to find out.
incline with only a small change in elevation where you Is the hill simply too rough'? Steep hills often have
can easily see all the way to the top. On a large hill, the ruts, gullies, troughs and exposed rocks because they
incline may get steeper as you near the top, but you may are more susceptible to the effects of erosion.
not see this because the crest of the hill is hidden by
bushes, grass orshrubs. Driving Uphill
Here are some other things to consider as you approach Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill, you
a hill. need to take some special steps.
0 Is there a constant incline, or does the hill get sharply Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the steering
steeper in places'? whee I.
Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain
surface cause tire slipping? your speed. Don't use more power than you need,
0 Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you because you don't want your wheels to start spinning
won't have to make turning maneuvers? or sliding.

4-18
0 Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible. If Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill to
the path twists and turnc;. you might want to find let opposing traffic know you're there.
another route. Use your headlamps even during the day. They make
you more visible to oncoming traffic.

Turning or driving across steep hills be can

dangerous. You could lose traction, slide Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at full speed can
sideways, and possibly roll over. You could be cause an accident. There could be a drop-off,
seriously injured orkilled. When driving uphills, embankment, cliff, or even another vehicle. You
always try togo straight up. could be seriously injuredor killed. As you near
the top of a hill, slow down and stay alert.
Ease up on your speed as you approach the top of the
hill.
Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more visible
to approaching traffic on trails or hills.

4-19
 ~- _ .

@ What should I do if my vehicle stalls,or is about As you are backing down the hill, put your left hand
to stall, and I can’t makeit up the hill? on the steering wheel at the 12 o’clock position. This
way, you’ll be able to tell if your wheels are straight
A: If this happens, there are some things you should and maneuver as you back down. It’s best that you
do, and there are some things you must not do. back down the hill with your wheels straight rather
First, here’s what you should do: than in the left or right direction. Turning the wheel
too far to the left or right will increase the possibility
0 Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and
of a rollover.
keep it from rolling backwards. Also, apply the
parking brake. Here are some things you must not do if you stall, orare
about to stall, when going up a hill.
0 If your engine is still running, shift the transmission
to REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into
slowly back down the hill in REVERSE (R). NEUTRAL (N) (or depressing the clutch, if you
have a manual transmission) to “rev-up” the engine
0 I f your engine has stopped running, you’ll need to and regain forward momentum. This won’t work.
restart it. With the brake pedal depressed and the Your vehicle will roll backwards very quickly and
parking brake still applied, shift the transmission to
you could go out of control.
PARK (P) (or, shift to NEUTRAL (N) if your
vehicle has a manual transmission) and restart the Instead, apply the regular braketo stop the vehicle. Then
engine. Then, shift to REVERSE (R), release the apply the parking brake. Shiftto REVERSE (R), release
parking brake, and slowly back down the hill as the parking brake, and slowly back straight down.
straight as possible in REVERSE (R). 0 Never attempt to turn around if you are about to stall
when going up a hill. I f the hill is steep enough to
stall your vehicle, it’s steep enough to cause you to
roll over if you turn around. If you can’t make it up
the hill. you must back straight down the hill.

4-20
Q: Suppose, after stalling, I try to back down
the hill and decide I just can’t doit. What
should I do?
A: Set the parking brake, put your transmission Shifting the tran,_r case to NEUTRAL(N) can
in PARK (P) (or the manual transmission i n cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission
FIRST ( 1 )) and turn off the engine. Leave the is in PARK (P) (or, if you have the manual
vehicle and go get some help. Exit on the uphill transmission, even if you’re in gear). This is
side and stay clear of the path the vehicle would because the NEUTRAL(N) position on the
take if it rolled downhill. Do not shift the transfer transfer case overrides the transmission. If you
case to NEUTRAL (N) when you leave the vehicle. are going to leave yourvehicle, set the parking
Leave it i n some gear. brake and shift the transmission to PARK (P)
(or, put your manual transmission in FIRST (1)).
But do not shift the transfer case to the
NEUTRAL (N) position. Leave the transfer
case in the 2 Wheel, 4 High or 4 Low position.

4-L1
Driving Downhill
When off-roading takes you downhill, you'll want to
consider a number of things:
How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to maintain Heavy braking when going down a hill can
vehicle control? cause your brakes to overheat and fade. This
could causeloss of'control and a serious accident.
What's the surface like'? Smooth'? Rough? Slippery'?
Hard-packed dirt? Gravel? Apply the brakes lightly when descending a
hill and usea low gear to keep vehicle speed
0 Are there hidden surface obstacles'? Ruts'? under control.
Logs'? Boulders?
What's at the bottom of the hill? Is there a hidden
creek bank or even a river bottom with large rocks'? e.' Are there some things I should not do when
driving downa hill?
If you decide you can go down a hill safely, then try to
keep your vehicle headed straight down, and use a low A: Yes! 'I'hese are important because if you ignore them
gear. This way, engine dragcan help your brakes and you could lose control and havea serious accident.
they won't have to do all the work. Descend slowly,
keeping your vehicle under control at all times. 0 When driving downhill, avoid turns that take you
across the incline of the hill. A hill that's not too
steep to drive down may be too steep to drive XI-OSS.
You could roll over if you don't drive straight down.
0 Never go downhill with the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), or with the clutch pedal depressed
in a manual shift. This is called "free-wheeling."
Your brakes will have to do all the work and could
overheat and fade.

A 33
 Am I likely to stall when going downhill? Driving Acrossan Incline
A: It‘s much more likely to happen going uphill. But Sooner or later, an off-road trail will probably go across
if it happens going downhill, here’s what to do. the incline of a hill. If this happens, you have t o decide
whether to try to drive across the incline. Here are sotne
Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes. things to consider:
Apply the parking brake.
0 A hill that can be driven straight up or down may be
Shift to PARK (P) (or to NEUTRAL (N) with the too steep to drive across. When you go straight up or
manual transmission) and, while still braking, restart down a hill, the length of the wheel base (the
the engine. distance from the front wheels to the rear wheels)
0 Shift back t o a low gear, release the parking brake, reduces the likelihood the vehicle will tumble end
and drive straight down. over end. But when you drive across at) incline, the
much more narrow track width (the distance between
0 If the engine won’t start, get out and get help. the left and right wheels) rnay not prevent the vehicle
from tilting and rolling over. Also, driving across an
incline puts more weight on the downhill wheels.
This could cause a downhill slide or a rollover.
0 Surfxe conditions can be a problem when you drive
across a hill. Loose gravel, rnuddy spots, or even wet
grass can cause your tires to slip sideways, downhill.
If the vehicle slips sideways, it can hit something
that will trip it (a rock, a rut, etc.) and roll over.

4-23
 Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the What if I’m driving acrossan incline that’s not
incline even worse. If you drive across a rock with too steep, butI hit some loose gravel and start to
the uphill wheels, or if the downhill wheels drop into slide downhill.What should I do?
a rut or depression, your vehicle can tilt even more.
For reasons like these, you need to decide carefully
A: If you feel your vehicle starting to slide sideways,
turn downhill. This should help straighten out the
whether to try to drive across an incline. Just because
the trail goes across the incline doesn’t mean you vehicle and prevent the side slipping. However, a
have to drive it. The last vehicle to try it might have much better way to prevent this is to get out and
rolled over. “walk the course’’ so you know what the surface is
like before you drive it.

Driving acrossan incline that’s too steepwill

make your vehicle roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. If you have any doubt
about the steepness of the incline, don’t drive
across it. Find another route instead.

4-24
Stalling on an Incline

P
If your vehicle stalls when you’re crossingan incline, be
sure you (and your passengers) get out on the uphill
side, even if the door there is harder to open. If you get Getting out on t--_ downhill (low) le c B vehicle
~

out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts toroll stopped across an inclineis dangerous. If the
over, you’ll be right in its path. vehicle rolls over, you could be crushed orkilled.
If you have to walk down the slope, stay outof the path Always getout on the uphill (high) side of the
the vehicle will take if it does roll over, vehicle and stay well clearof the rollover path.

4-25
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow or Ice Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction.
On these surfaces, it’s very easy to lose control. On wet
When you drive in mud, snow or sand,your wheels ice, for example, the traction is so poor that you will
won’t get good traction. You can’t accelerate as have difficulty accelerating. And if you do get moving,
quickly, turning is more difficult, and you’ll need poor steering and difficult braking can cause you to slide
longer braking distances. out of control.
It’s best to use a low gear when you’re in mud -- the
deeper the mud, the lower the gear. In really deep mud,
I
the idea is to keep your vehicle moving so you don’t
get stuck.
A
--
CAUTION:
-I-
When you drive on sand, you’ll sense a change in wheel Driving on frozen lakes, pondsor rivers can be
traction. But it will depend upon how loosely packed the dangerous. Underwater springs,currents under
sand is. On loosely packed sand (as on beaches or sand the ice,or sudden thawscan weaken the ice.Your
dunes) your tires will tend to sink intothe sand. This has vehicle could fall through the ice
and you and
an effect on steering, accelerating and braking. You may your passengerscould’drown.Drive your vehicle
want to reduce the air pressure in your tires slightly
on safesurfaces only.
when driving on sand. Thiswill improve traction.

4-26
Driving in Water
Light rain causes no special off-road driving problems.
But heavy rain can mean flash flooding, and flood
waters demand extreme caution. 1 -1ving .--:ough rushing water cal be dangerous.
Find out how deep the water is before you drive through Deep water can sweep your vehicle downstream
it. If it’s deep enough to cover your wheel hubs, axles or and you and your passengers could drown. If it’s
exhaust pipe, don’t try it -- you probably won’t get only shallow water, it can still wash away the
through. Also, water that deep can damage your axle ground from under your tires, and you could lose
and other vehicle parts. traction and roll thevehicle over. Don’t drive
If the water isn’t too deep,then drive throughit through rushing water.
slowly. At fast speeds, water splashes on your ignition
system and your vehicle can stall. Stallingcan also
occur if you get your tailpipe under water. And, as See “DrivingThrough Water” in the Index for more
long as your tailpipe is under water, you’ll never be information on driving through water.
able to start your engine. When you go through water,
remember that when your brakes get wet, it may take
you longer to stop.

4-27
After Off-Road Driving Driving at Night
Remove any brush or debristhat has collected on the
underbody, chassis or under the hood. These
accumulations can be a firehazard.
After operation in mud or sand,have the brake linings
cleaned and checked. These substances can cause
glazing and uneven braking. Check the body structure,
steering, suspension, wheels, tires and exhaust system
for damage. Also, check the fuel lines and cooling
system for any leakage.
Your vehicle will require more frequent service due to
off-road use. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for
additional information.

Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.

One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired -- by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.

4-28
Here are some tips on night driving. have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you’re
driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night. They may cut
0 Drive defensively.
down on glare fromheadlamps, but they also make a lot
0 Don’t drink and drive. of things invisible.
0 Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
glare from headlamps behind you. headlamps. It can take a second or two, oreven several
0 Since you can’t see as well, you may need to seconds, foryour eyes to readjust to the dark. When you
slow down and keep more space between you are faced with severe glare (as from a driver who
and other vehicles. doesn’t lower the high beams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring
e Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your directly into the approaching headlamps.
headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
0 In remote areas, watch for animals. clean -- inside and out. Glare at night is made much
0 If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe place worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
and rest. can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
Night Vision making the pupils of your eyes contractrepeatedly.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But as Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
we get older these differences increase.A 50-year-old roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your
driver may require at least twice as much light to see the eyes moving; that way, it’s easier to pick out dimly
same thing at night as a 20-year-old. lighted objects. Justas your headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes
What you do in the daytime can also affect your night be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night
vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright blindness -- the inability to see in dim light -- and aren’t
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes will even aware of it.

4-29
Driving in Rain and on
Wet Roads Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you can’t stop, accelerate or turn as well because
your tire-to-road traction isn’t as good as on dry roads.
And, if your tires don’t have much tread left, you’ll get
even less traction. It’s always wise to go slower and be
cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving. The
surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are
tuned for drivingon dry pavement.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, aheavy rain
can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals,
pavement markings, the edge of the road and even
people walking.
It’s wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape
and keep your windshield washer tank filled with
washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts
when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on
the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to separate
from the inserts.

4-30
 Wt wake cause accidents ’y won’t WI 6
well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to one
side. You could lose controlof the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddleof water or
a vehicle wash, apply your brake pedal lightly
until yourbrakes work normally.

Driving too fast through large water puddles oreven

going through some vehicle washes can cause problems,
too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid
puddles. But if you can’t, try to slow down before you
hit them.

4-31
Hydroplaning Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the water.
This can happen if the road is wet enough and you’re
I NOTICE:
going fast enough.When your vehicle is hydroplaninp.
it has little orno contact with the road. If you drivetoo quickly through deep puddles or
standing water, water can come in through your
Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it can if your engine’s air intake and badly damage your
tires haven’t much tread or if the pressure in one or
engine. Neverdrive through water that is slightly
more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is standing on
the road. If you can see reflections from trees, telephone lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If you
poles or othervehicles, and raindrops “dimple” the can’t avoid deep puddles or standing water, drive
water’s surface, there could be hydroplaning. through them very slowly.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you pass
another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room
ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted
by road spray.
0 Have good tires with proper tread depth. (See
“Tires” in the Index.)

4-32
City Driving Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
0 Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into an
unknown part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.
0 Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most
large cities. You’ll save time and energy. (See the
next part, “Freeway Driving.”)
0 Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough to
need it. When a light turns green, and just before
you start to move, check both ways for vehicles that
have not cleared the intersection or may be running
the red light.

One of the biggest problems with city streets is the

amount of traffic on them. You’ll want, to watch out for
what the other drivers aredoing and pay attention to
traffic signals.

4-33
Freeway Driving At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the
freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you
drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to
check traffic. Try to determinewhere you expect to
blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to
the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check
your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as
necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it’s slower. Stay
in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder 10 make sure there isn’t another vehicle in your
“blind” spot.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to move
Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways, slightly slower at night.
expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the safest
of all roads. But they have their own special rules. When you want to leave the freeway, move to the proper
lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do not,
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive on to
up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the same the next exit.
speed most of the other drivers are driving.Too-fast or
too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
4-34
The exit speed is usually posted. Here are some things you can check before a trip:
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not 0 Windshield Wusher Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Are
to your sense of motion. After driving forany distance all windows clean inside and outside?
at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are going 0 Wiper Blades:Are they in good shape?
slower than you actually are.
0 Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
Before Leaving on a Long Trip all levels?
Make sure you’re ready. Try to be well rested. If you 0 Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
must start when you’re not fresh -- such as after aday’s 0 Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
work -- don’t plan to make too many miles that first part
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
of the journey. Wear comfortable clothingand shoes you
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
can easily drive in.
recommended pressure?
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip?If you keep it 0 Weather Forecusts: What’s the weather outlook
serviced and maintained, it’s ready to go. If it needs
along your route? Should you delay your trip a short
service, have it done before starting out. Of course,
time to avoid a major storm system?
you’ll find experienced and able service expertsin GM
dealerships all across North America. They’ll be ready 0 Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
and willing to help if you need it.

4-35
Highway Hypnosis Hill and Mountain Roads

What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be

aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
0 Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
0 Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and
to the sides. Check your mirrors and your
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
instruments frequently.
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest, service
I f you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’re
or parking area and take a nap, get some exercise, or
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can
both. For safety, treat drowsiness on the highway as
make your trips safer and more enjoyable. (See
an emergency.
“Off-Road Driving” in the Index for information about
driving off-road.)

4-36
0 Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system and
transmission. These parts can work hard on
A CAUTION: I
mountain roads.
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL(N) or with the
0 Know how to go down hills. The most important ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have to
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of the
do all the workof slowing down. They could get so
slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or longhill. hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would then
have poor braking oreven none going down a hill.
You could crash. Always have your engine running
A CAUTION: and your vehicle in gear when you go downhill.

so
If you don’t shift down, your brakes could get 0 Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down
hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would then to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine
have poor braking oreven none going down a hill. and transmission, andyou can climb the hill better.
You could crash. Shift down to let your engine 0 Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
assist your brakes on a steep downhillslope. roads in hills or mountains. Don’t swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let
you stay in your own lane.
0 As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There
could be something in your lane, like a stalled car
or an accident.
0 You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of
special problems. Examplesare long grades, passing or
no-passing zones, a falling rocks area or winding
roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate action.
4-37
Winter Driving Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply
of windshield washer fluid, a rag,some winter outer
clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth and a
couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if you will
be driving under severe conditions, include a small bag
of sand, a piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags
to help provide traction. Be sure you properly secure
these items in your vehicle.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet the
road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or icebetween your tires
and the road, you can have a very slippery situation.
You'll have a lot less traction or "grip" and will need
to be very careful.

Here are some tips for winter driving:

Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your vehicle.

4-38
 Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction.
If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and
polish the surface under the tires even more.
Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability
when you make a hard stop on a slippery road. Even
though you have an anti-lock braking system, you’ll
I
want to’begin stopping sooner than you would on dry
pavement. See “Anti-Lock‘’ in the Index.
Allow greater following distance on any
’ slippery road.
Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that’s covered with ice. On an
otherwise clear: road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around
clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass may
What’s the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear. If
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet you see a patch of ice ahead of you, brake before y,ou
ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the are onit. Try not tobrake while you’re actually on
least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’s about the ice, and avoid sudden steering maneuvers.
freezing (32°F; 0”C) and freezing rain begins to fall.
Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt: and sand crews
can get there.
Whatever the condition -- smooth ice, packed, blowing
or loose snow -- drive with caution.

4-39
If You’re Caught in a Blizzard Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you’ve been stopped by the snow.
Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you have no blankets or extra clothing,make body
insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor
mats -- anything you can wrap around yourself or
tuck under your clothing to keep warm.

If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a

serious situation. You should probably stay with your
vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help
and you can hike through the snow. Here are some
things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your
passengers safe:
Turn on your hazard flashers. You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.

4-40
 Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster
than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. This
uses less fuel forthe heat that you get and it keeps the
Snow can trap exhaL-- gases under yourvehicle. battery (or batteries) charged.You will need a
This cancause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas well-charged battery (or batteries) to restart the vehicle,
to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill and possibly for signaling lateron with your headlamps.
you. You can’t see it orsmell it, so you might not Let the heater run for awhile.
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from If you have a diesel engine, you may have to run it at a
around the base of your vehicle, especiallyany higher speed to getenough heat. Then, shut theengine
that is blocking your exhaust pipe. And check off and close thewindow almost all the way to preserve
around again from time to time to be sure snow the heat. Start the engineagain and repeat this only
doesn’t collectthere. when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold.But
Open a window just a little on the side of the do it as little as possible. Preservethe fuel as long as you
vehicle that’s away from thewind. This will help can. To help keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle
and do some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or
keep CO out.
so until help comes.

4-41
Loading Your Vehicle
-
your front and rear axles, you need to go to aweigh
station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help
r you with this. Be sure tospread out your load equally
.- on
both sides of the centerline.

1 Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the

GAWR for eitherthe front or rear axle.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread
.Dl it out.

u--
n
U
SEE OWNER'S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
A CAUTION:
m -
The CertificationEire label isfound on the rear edge of
the driver's door or in the Incomplete Vehicle Document In thecase of a sudden stop or collision, things
in the cab. carried in the bedof your truck could shift
forward and come into the passenger area,
The label shows the size of your original tires and the injuring you and others. If you put thingsin the
inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross weight
bed of your truck, you should make sure they are
capacity of your vehicle. This is called the GVWR
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). The GVWR includes the properly secured.
weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fueland cargo. I

The Certificatiooire label also tells you the maximum Using heavier suspension components to get added
weights for the front and rear axles, calledGross Axle durability might not change your weight ratings. Ask
Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads on your dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way.

4-42
 A CAUTION: A CAU I ION:
I
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the Things you put inside yourvehicle can strike
GVWR, or either the maximum frontor rear and injurepeople in a sudden stop or turn, or
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, in a crash.
or it can change theway your vehicle handles. 0 Put things in the cargo area of your vehicle.
These could cause you to lose control. Also, Try to spread the weight evenly.
overloading can shorten thelife of your vehicle. 0 Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside thevehicle so that some of them are
above the topsof the seats.
0 Don’t leave an unsecured child restraint in
NOTICE: your vehicle.
0 When you carry something inside the
Your warranty dose not cover parts or vehicle, secure it wheneveryou can.
components that fail because
of overloading. 0 Don’t leave a seat folded down unlessyou
need to.
If you put things insideyour vehicle -- like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else -- they go asfast as the There’s also important loading information for off-road
vehicle goes.If you have to stop orturn quickly, or if driving in this manual. See “Loading Your Vehicle” in
there is a crash, they’ll keep going. the Index.

4-43
Truck-Camper Loading Information
This label is inside your glove box. It will tell you if
your vehicle can carry a slide-in camper, how much of a
load your vehicle.can carry, and how to correctly spread
out your load. Also, it will help you match the right
slide-in camper to your vehicle.
When you carry a slide-in camper, the total cargo load
of your vehicle is the weight of the camper, PLUS
everything elseadded to the camper after it left
the factory;
everything in the camper; and Refer to the Truck Camper Loading Information label in
glove box for A and B dimensions.
all the people inside.
Use the rear edge of the load floor formeasurement
The Cargo Weight Rating (CWR) is the maximum purposes.
weight of the load your vehicle can carry. It doesn’t
include theweight of the people inside. But, you can The recommended location for the cargo center of gravity
figure about 150 Ibs. (68 kg) for each seat. for the Cargo Weight Rating (CWR) is the point where
the mass of a body is concentrated and, if suspended at
The total cargo load must not be more than your that point, would balance thefront and rear.
vehicle’s CWR.

4-44
Here is an example of proper truck and camper match: Your dealer can helpyou make a good vehicle-camper
match. He’ll also help you determine your CWR.
After you’ve loaded your vehicle and camper, drive to a
weigh station and weigh on the front and rear wheels
separately. This will tell you the loads on your axles.
The’loads on the front and rear axles shouldn’t be more
than either of the GAWRs. The total of the axle loads
should not be more than the GVWR.
Open your driver’s door and look at the Certificationflire
label to find out your GAWR and GVWR.
If you’ve gone over your weight ratings, move or take
out some things until all the ,weight falls below the
ratings. Of course, you should always tie down any
A. Camper Center of Gravity
loose itemswhen you load your vehicle or camper.
B. Recommended Center of Gravity Location Zone
When you install and load your slide-in camper, check
The camper’s center of gravity should fall within the the manufacturer’s instructions.
center of gravity zone foryour vehicle’s cargo load.
If you want more information on curb weights, cargo
You must weigh any accessories or other equipment that weights, Cargo Weight Rating and the correct centerof
you add to your vehicle. Then, subtract this extraweight gravity zone for your vehicle, your dealer can help you.
from the CWR. This extraweight may shorten the Just askfor a copy of “Consumer Information,
center of gravity zoneof your vehicle. Your dealer can Truck-Camper Loading.’’
help you with this.
If your slide-in camper and its load weighs less than the
CWR, the center of gravity zone for your vehicle may
be larger.
4-45
Trailer Recommendations (See the “Warranty and Owner Assistance” booklet for
Zone Office.) Owners should be aware that, as
You must subtract your hitch loads from theCWR for manufactured, there are differences between a chassis
your vehicle. Weigh your vehicle with the trailer attached, cab and a pickup with the box removed which may
so that you won’t go over theGVWR or GAWR. affect vehicle safety. The components necessary to adapt
You’ll get the best performance if you spread out the a pickup to permit its safe use with a specialized body
weight of your load the right way, and if you choose the should be installed by a body builder in accordance with
correct hitch and trailer brakes. the information available from the Zone Office.
For more information, see “Trailer Towing”in the Index. Towing a Trailer
Camper Wiring Harness (Option)
A five-wire harness is stored in the front stake pocket on
the driver’s side of the bed. Theharness has no
p c .UTION:
connector and should be wired by a qualified electrical
technician. It must be routed out of your vehicle and If you don’t use the correct equipment and drive
securely attached so that it won’t be pulled or rubbed properly, youcan lose control when you pull a
while you’re using it. Storethe harness in it’s original trailer, Forexample, if the traileris too heavy, the
position. Wrap the harness toeether and tie it neatly so it --
brakes may not work well or even at all, You
won’t be damaged. and your passengers could be seriously injured.
Pull a trailer only if you have
followed all the
Pickup Conversion to Chassis Cab steps in this section.Ask your GM dealer for
General Motors is aware that some vehicle owners may advice and informationabout towing a trailer
consider having the pickup box removed and a with your vehicle.
commercial or recreational body installed. Before you
do so, first contact the GM Zone Office foryour area for
information on such conversions specific tothis vehicle.

4-46
 If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
NOTICE: If you do, here are some importantpoints:
0 There are many different laws, including speed limit
Pulling a trailer improperly can damage your
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by your rig will be legal, not only where you live but
your warranty. To pull a trailer correctly, follow also where you’ll be driving. A good source for this
the advice in this part, and see your GM dealer information can be state orprovincial police.
for important information about towing a trailer
with your vehicle. Consider using a sway control if your trailer will
weigh 4,000 lbs. (1 800 kg) or less. You should
always use a sway control if your trailer will weigh
Every vehicle is ready for some trailer towing.If yours more than 4,000 lbs. (1 800 kg). You can ask a hitch
was built with trailering options, as many are, it’s ready dealer aboutsway controls.
for heaviertrailers. But trailering is different than just Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means changes (800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
in handling, durability and fuel economy. Successful, axle or otherparts could be damaged.
safe traileringtakes correct equipment, and it has to be
used properly. Then, during the first500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, don’t drive over50 mph (80 km/h) and
That’s the reason for this part.In it are many don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
time-tested, important trailering tipsand safety rules. engine and other partsof your vehicle wear in at the
Many of these are important foryour safety and that of heavier loads.
your passengers. So please read this section carefully
before you pull a trailer.

4-47
 If you have an automatic transmission, you can tow Use one of the following charts todetermine how mucn
in OVERDRIVE (a). You may want to shift the your vehicle can weigh, based upon your vehicle model
transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower and options.
gear selection if the transmission shifts too often
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming the
(e.g., under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions). If driver and one passenger are in the tow vehicle and it
you have a manual transmission and you are towing has all the required trailering equipment. The weight of
a trailer, it’s better not to use FIFTH ( 5 ) gear. Just
additional optional equipment, passengers and cargo in
drive in FOURTH (4) gear (or, as you need to, a
the tow vehicle must be subtracted from the maximum
lower gear).
trailer weight.
Three important considerations have to dowith weight: Above the 2,000 lbs. (908 kg) trailer rating, the engine
the weight of the trailer, oil cooler is required on C/K- 1500 models with gas
the weight of the trailer tongue
engines and C/K-2500 models with gas engines and
and the weight on yourvehicle’s tires.
3.73 (or lower) axle ratio. .
Weight of the Trailer Above the 4,000 lbs. (1 800 kg) trailer rating,
How heavy can a trailer safely be? heavy-duty or gas shock absorbers are required
on C- 1500 models, and heavy-duty shock absorbers
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For or the off-road chassis package are required on
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside K-1500 models.
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull a
trailer areall important. And, it can also depend on any
special equipment that you have on your vehicle.

4-48
C-1500 (2WD) K-1500 (4WD)
Engine(Trans.)AxleRatio Max. Trailer Wt. Engine (Trans.) Axle Ratio Max. Trailer Wt.
4.3L (Auto.) 3.08 4,000 lbs.(1 800 kg) 4.3L (Auto.) 3.73 5,000 lbs. (2 270 kg)
3.42 5,000 lbs. (2 270 kg)
4.3L (Manual) 3.73 2,500 lbs. (1 135 kg)
4.3L (Manual) 3.08 2,000 lbs. (908 kg)
5.0L (Auto.) 3.42 5,500 lbs. (2 497 kg)
3.42 2,500 lbs. (1 135 kg)
3.73 6,500 lbs. (2 95 1 kg)
5.0L (Auto.) 3.08 5,000 lbs. (2 270 kg)
5.0L (Manual) 3.42 3,000 lbs. (1 362 kg)
3.42 6,000 lbs. (2 724 kg)
3.73 4,000 lbs.(1 800 kg)
5.0L (Manual) 3.08 2,500 lbs. (1 135 kg)
5.7L 3.42 6,000 lbs. (2 724 kg)
3.42 3,500 lbs. (1 589 kg)
3.73 7,000 lbs. (3 178 kg)
5.7L 3.08 5,500 lbs. (2497 kg)
6.5L Diesel 3.42 6,500 lbs. (2 951 kg)
3 -42 6,500 lbs. (2 95 1 kg)
(Auto.) 3.73 7,500 lbs. (3 405kg)
3.73 7,500 lbs. (3 405 kg)
6.5L Diesel 3.08 6,000 lbs.(2 724 kg)
(Auto) 3.42 7,000 lbs. ( 3 178 kg)

* 4-49
C-2500 (2WD) K-2500 (4WD)
Engine(Trans.)AxleRatio Max. Trailer Wt. Engine(Trans.)AxleRatioMax.TrailerWt.
4.3L (Auto.) 3.42 4,500 lbs. (2 043 kg) 4.3L (Auto.) 3.73 4,500 lbs. (2 043 kg)
3.73 5,000 lbs. (2 270 kg)
.4.3L (Manual) 3.73 2,000 lbs. (908 kg)
4.3L (Manual) 3.42 2,000 lbs. (908 kg)
5.0L (Auto.) 3.42 5,000 lbs. (2 270 kg)
5.0L (Auto.) 3.42 5,500 lbs. (2 497kg) 3.73 6,000 lbs.(2 724 kg)
3.73 6,500 lbs. (2 95 1 kg)
5.0L (Manual) 3.42 2,500 lbs. (1 135 kg)
5.0L (Manual) 3.42 3,000 lbs. (1 362 kg) 3.73 3,500 lbs. (1 589 kg)
3.73 4,000 lbs. (1 800 kg)
5.7L 3.42 5,500 lbs. (2497 kg)
5.7L 3 -42 6,000 lbs. (2 724kg) 3.73 6,500 lbs. (2 95 1 kg)
3.73 7,000 lbs.(3 178 kg) 4.10 7,500 lbs. (3 405 kg)
4.10 8,000 Ibs. (3 632 kg)
6.5L Diesel 3.42 6,000 lbs. (2 724kg)
6.5L Diesel 3.42 6,500 lbs. (2 95 1 kg) (Auto.) 3.73 7,000 lbs. (3 178 kg)
(Auto.) 3.73 7,500 lbs. (3 405 kg) 4.10 8,000 lbs. (3 632 kg)
4.10 8,500 lbs. (3 859 kg)
6.5L Diesel 3.73 6,000 lbs. (2 724kg)
6.5L Diesel 3.73 6,500 lbs. (2 95 1 kg) (Manual) 4.10 7,000 lbs. (3 178 kg)
(Manual) 4.10 7,500 lbs. (3 405 kg)

4-50
 C-3500 (ZWD) K-3500 (4WD)
Engine(Trans.)Axle RatioMax.TrailerWt. Engine(Trans.)AxleRatioMax.Trailer Wt.
2 (3 lbs.
8,000
4.10
5.7L kg) 7,500
4.10
5.7L lbs. (3 405 kg)
4.56
9,500 Ibs. (3,363kg)
6.5L Diesel 4.10 8,000 lbs. (3 632 kg)
6.5L Diesel 4.10 8,500 lbs. (3 859 kg) (Auto.)
(Auto.) 6.5L Diesel 4.10 7,000 lbs. (3 178 kg)
6.5L Diesel 4.10 7,500 lbs. (3 405 kg) (Manual)
(Manual) 10,500 lbs.*
7.4L 4.10
7.4L 4.10 1 1,000 Ibs."' (4 767 kg)
(4 994kg) 4.56 12,500 lbs. #:
4.56 13,000 lbs? (5 675 kg)
(5 902 kg)
*Fifth wheel hitch rating; weight distributing hitch
*Fifth wheel hitch rating; weight distributing hitch rating is limited to 10,000 lbs. (4 540 kg).
rating is limited to 10,000 lbs. (4 540 kg).

4-51
 C-3500 Crew Cab (2WD) K-3500 Crew Cab (4WD)
Engine (Trans.) AxleRatioMax.Trailer Wt. Engine(Trans.)AxleRatioMax.Trailer Wt.
7,500
4.10
5.7L lbs. (3 405 kg) 7,000
4.10
5.7L lbs. (3 178 kg)
4.56 9,000 lbs.(4086 kg) 4.56 8,500 lbs. (3859 kg)
6.5L Diesel 4.10 8,000 lbs. (3 632kg) 6.5L Diesel 4.10 8,000 lbs. (3 632 kg)
(Auto.) (Auto.)
6.5L Diesel 4.10 7,000 lbs. (3 178 kg) 6.5L Diesel 4.10 7,000 lbs. (3 178 kg)
(Manual) (Manual)
7.4L 4.10 10,500 lbs.* 7.4L 4.10 10,500 lbs.*
(4 767kg) (4 767 kg)
4.56 12,500 lbs.* 4.56 12,500 lbs.*
( 5 675 kg) (5 675 kg)
*Fifth wheel'hitch rating;weight distributing hitch *Fifth wheel hitch rating; weight distributing hitch
rating is limited to 10,000 lbs. (4 540kg). rating is limited to 10,000 lbs. (4 540 kg).

4-52
C-3500 HD Chassis Cab You can ask your dealer for ourtrailering information or
advice, or you can write us at the address listed in your
Engine (Trans.) Axle RatioMax.TrailerWt.
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information Booklet.
5.7L lbs.
8,500
4.63 (3
kg)859
5.138,500 lbs. (3859kg) In Canada, writeto:
General Motorsof Canada Limited
6.5L Diesel 4.63 8,000 lbs. (3 632 kg) Customer Assistance Center
(Auto.) 5.13 10,500 lbs.* 1908 Colonel Sam Drive
(4 767 kg) Oshawa, OntarioLlH 8P7
6.5L Diesel 4.63 7,000 lbs. (3 178 kg) Weight of the TrailerTongue
(Manual) 5.13 8,500 lbs. (3859 kg)
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important
7.4L 4.63 12,500 lbs.“ weight to measure because itaffects the total or gross
(5 675 kg) weight of your vehicle. The GrossVehicle Weight
5.13 12,500 lbs? (GVW) includesthe curb weight of the vehicle, any
cargo you may carry in it, and the people who will be
( 5 675 kg)
riding in the vehicle. And if you will tow a trailer, you
*Fifth wheel hitch rating; weight distributing hitch
must add the tongue load to the GVW because your
rating is limited to 10,000 lbs. (4 540 kg).
vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See “Loading
Your Vehicle” in the Index for more information about
your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.

4-53
 Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the limit for
cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the Certification
label at the rear edge of the driver’s door or see“Tire
Loading” in the Index. Then be sure you don’t go over
the GVW limit for your vehicle, including the weight of
the trailer tongue.
Hitches
A B It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are a
few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here are
some rules to follow:
If you use a step-bumper hitch, your bumper could
If you’re using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer be damaged in sharp turns. Make sure you have
tongue (A) should weigh 10 percent of the total loaded ample room when turning to avoid contact between
trailer weight (B). If you’re using a weight-distributing the trailer and the bumper.
hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 12 percent of If you’ll be pulling a trailer..that, when loaded, will
the total loaded trailer weight (B). weigh more than 4,000 lbs. (1 800 kg), be sure to use
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and a properly mounted, weight-distributing hitch and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are sway control of the proper size. This equipment is
proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to get them right very important for proper vehicle loading and good
simply by moving some items around in the trailer. handling when you’re driving.

4-54
Safety Chains If everything checks out thisfar, make the brake tap
at theport on themaster cylinder that sends the fluid to
You should always attach chainsbetween your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue the rear brakes.But don’t use copper tubing forthis. If
of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to the road you do, it will bend and finally break off. Use steel
if it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions brake tubing.
about safety chains may be provided by the hitch Driving witha Trailer
manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the
manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching safety Towing a trailerrequires a certain amount of experience.
chains and do not attach them to the bumper. Always Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get
leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig. to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
And, never allow safety chains to dragon the ground. handling and braking with the added weight of the
trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
Trailer Brakes driving isnow a good deal longer and not nearly as
If your trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs. (450 kg) responsive asyour vehicle isby itself.
loaded, then it needs its own brakes -- and they must be Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform
adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for (and attachments),safety chains, electrical connector,
the trailer’brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjustand lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has
maintain them properly. electric brakes, startyour vehicle and trailer moving and
Your trailer brakesystem can tap into the vehicle’s then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
hydraulic brake system only if the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
0 The trailer parts can withstand 3,000 psi
(20 650 kPa) of pressure. During your trip, check occasionally to be surethat the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes
0 The trailer’s brake system will use less than are still working.
0.02 cubic inch(0.3 cc) of fluid from your vehicle’s
master cylinder. Otherwise, both braking systems
won’t work well. You could even lose your brakes.
4-55
Following Distance Making Turns
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you
would when driving your vehicle without a trailer. This NOTICE:
can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking
and sudden turns.
Making very sharp turns while trailering could
Passing cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
making very sharp turns while trailering.
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal
longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane. When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns than
normal. Do this so your trailer won’tstrike soft shoulders,
Backing Up curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.Avoid jerky or
sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to theright, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if
possible, have someone guide you.

4-56
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer If you have an automatic transmission, you should use
THIRD (3) (or, as you need to, a lower gear) when
The green arrows on your instrument panel will flash towing a trailer. Operating your vehicle in THIRD (3)
whenever you signal a turn or lane change. Properly when towing a trailer will minimize heat build-up and
hooked up, the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other extend the life of your transmission
drivers you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.
If you have a manual transmission and you are towing a
When towing a trailer, the green arrows on your trailer, it’s better not to use FIFTH ( 5 ) gear. Just drive in
instrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on FOURTH (4) gear (or, as you need to, a lower gear).
the trailer are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers
behind you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a
bulbs are still working. lower temperature than at normal altitudes. If you turn
your engine off immediately after towing at high altitude
Driving On Grades on steep uphill grades, your vehicle may show signs
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start similar to engine overheating.To avoid this, let the
down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift engine run while parked (preferably on level ground)
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that with the automatic transmission in PARK (P) (or the
they would get hot and no longer work well. manual transmission out of gear and the parking brake
applied) for a few minutes before turning the engine off.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce your If you do get the overheat warning, see“Engine
speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce the Overheating” in the Index.
possibility of engine andtransmission overheating.
Parking on Hills
You really should not park your vehicle, with a trailer
attached, on a hill. If something goes wrong, your rig
could start to move. People can be injured, and both
your vehicle and the trailer can be damaged.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
F. --
It canbe dangerous to get out
of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully PARK
in (P) with the
parking brake firmlyset. Your vehiclecan roll.
If you have left the engine running, the
can move suddenly.You or others could be
vehicle

PARK (P) yet for an automatic transmission, or into injured. To be sure yourvehicle won’t move, even
gear for a manual transmission. when you’re on fairly level ground, use the steps
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels. that follow.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the If you have four-wheel drive and your transfer
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load. case is in NEUTRAL (N), your vehicle will be free
PARK (P). So,
to roll, evenif your shift lever is in
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake and shift into PARK (P) for an
be sure the transfer case --
is in a drive gear not
in NEUTRAL (N).
automatic transmission, or REVERSE (R) for a
manual transmission.
5. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure
the transfer case is in a drive gear and not in
NEUTRAL (N).
6 . Release the regular brakes.
When You Are Ready to Leave After Trailer Wiring Harness
Parking on a Hill A seven-wire harness is stored under the rear end of
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down your vehicle, between the frame rails. An electrical
while you: connector will need to be installed at the trailer end of
the harness, by a qualified electrical technician. For
0 Start your engine; additional trailer wiring and towing information please
0 Shift into a gear; and consult your GM dealer. Securely attach the harness to
the trailer, then tape or strap it to your vehicle’s frame
0 Release the parking brake. rail. Be sure you leave it loose enough so the wiring
2. Let up on the brake pedal. won’t bind or break when turning with the trailer, but
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
not so loose that it drags on the ground. Store the
harness in its original position. Wrap the harness
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks. together and tie it neatly so it won’t be damaged. If you
tow a trailer, your Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
Maintenance When Trailer Towing (CHMSL) may not be properly visible from behind.
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re You should select a trailer with a CHMSL on it or, if
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more one is not available, have one installed. Seeyour GM
on this. Things that are especially importantin trailer dealer abouthow to connect your vehicle’s wiring to
operation are automatictransmission fluid (don’t a trailer CHMSL.
overfill), engine oil, axlelubricant, belt, cooling system
and brake adjustment. Each of these is covered in this
manual, and the Index will help you find them quickly.
If you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review these
sections beforeyou start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.

4-59
Power Winches ’ower Take-Off (PTO)
If you wish to use a power winch on your vehicle, only
use it when your vehicle is stationary or anchored.
NOTICE:
NOTICE: If you have a PTO that will exceed 35 hp installed
on yourvehicle, it coulddamage the transfer
Using a power winch with the transmission in case or transmission. When having a PTO
gear may damage the transmission. When installed on yourvehicle, make sure that will
it
operating a power winch, always leave the not exceed 35 hp.
transmission in NEUTRAL (N).
Before using a PTO, refer to the manufacturer’s or
Use the regular brakes, set the parking brake, or block installer’s instructions.
the wheels to keep your vehicle from rolling.
NOTICE:
Using a PTOwhile operating in one place before
the vehicle has reached normal operating
temperature can damage the transfer case or
transmission. If you will be using thePTO while
operating in one place, drive and warm up the
vehicle before using the PTO.

4-60
I o engage a PTO: Using a Transfer Case Mounted Power
1. Set the parking brake. Take-Off (Manual Transmission)
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (N). 1 . Set the parking brake.
3. Hold the clutch pedal down and engage the PTO. 2. Shift the transfer case into NEUTRAL (N).
3. Hold the clutch pedal down. If the vehicle will
remain in the same place, shift the transmission into
NOTICE: the highest gear.

Using a PTO for more thanfour hours without 4. Engage the PTO.
driving your vehiclecan damage thetransfer case If you are going to drive the vehicle, shift the
or transmission. If using a PTO for more than transmission into the gear you want. Then shift the
four hours without driving your vehicle, drive transfer case into the rangeyou want, apply the
your vehicle for a while to allow the transfercase regular brakes and release the parking brake.
and transmission to cool. 5. Release the clutch (and the regular brakes) as you
normally would. When you release the clutch, the
PTO will start.
If you are going to drive the vehicle, shift the
transmission into the gear you want. Then shift the
transfer case into the range you want (if you have
four-wheel drive), applythe regular brakes and
release the parking brake.
4. Release the clutch (and the regular brakes) as you
normally would. When you release the clutch, the
PTO will start.

4-61
Using a Transfer Case Mounted Power If you will be using the
Take-Off (Automatic Transmission) bumper to tow a trailer,
you must remove the
1. Set the parking brake. center cutout circle toI

2. Shift the transfer case intoNEUTRAL (N). install the trailer ball. You
must also remove both outer
3. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (N). cutouts to attach the trailer
4. Engage the PTO. safety chaitfs.
If you are going to drivethe vehicle, shift the
transfer case into the rangeyou want. Then apply the
regular brakes and release the parking brake.
5. Shift the transmission to THIRD(3) to start the PTO. To remove the pad, lift
the edge of the pad from
6. Release the regular brakes to drive thevehicle. the rear of the bumper
and swing it forward.
Step-Bumper- Pad When the pad releases
If your vehicle has a rear step bumper, it may from the bumper holes,
be equipped with a rear step pad at thecenter of lift the pad off.
the bumper.

4-62 I ,
 Section 5 Problems on the Road

Here you’ll find what to do about some problems that Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
can occuron the road. also let police know you have a problem. Your front and
rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
Hazard Warning Flashers But they won’t flash if you’re braking.
Press the button at the top
of the steering column all
the way down to make your
front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off.

Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what

position your key is in, and even if the key isn’t in.
 To turn off the flashers, press the button until the first
click and release.
When the hazard warning flashers areon, your turn
signals won’t work. Batteries can hurtyou. They can be
Other Warning Devices dangerous because:
If you carry reflective triangles, you can use them to .e They contain acid that can burnyou.
warn others. Set one up at the side of the road about They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
300 feet (100 m) behind your vehicle. They contain enough electricity to burn you.
If you don’t follow these stepsexactly, someor all
Jump Starting of these things can hurt you.
If your battery has run down, you may want to
use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start
your vehicle. But please use the following steps to 1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
do it safely. battery with a negative ground system,

I NOTICE: I .NOTICE: ’,

Ignoring these steps could result costly

in damage If the other systemisn’t a 12-volt system witha
to yourvehicle that wouldn’t be coveredby your negative ground, bothvehicles can be damaged.
vehicle warranty.
Don’t try to start your vehicle by pushing or
pulling it. This could damage your vehicle, even if
you have a manual transmission. Andif you have
an automatic transmission, won’t
it start thatway.

‘
I
5-2
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching
each other. If they are, it could cause aground
I NOTICE:
connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able to If you leave yourradio on, it could be badly
start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could damaged. Therepairs wouldn’t be coveredby
damage the electrical systems.
your warranty.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,
set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles
involved in the jump start procedure. Put an 4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find
automatic transmission in PARK (P) or a manual the positive (+) and negative (-) terminals on
transmission in NEUTRAL (N). If you have a each battery.
four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the transfer
case is not in NEUTRAL (N).
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter oraccessory power outlets, if you have this If your vehiclehas air conditioning, the auxiliary
option. Turn off all lamps that aren’t needed as well electric fan under the hoodcan start upeven
as radios. This will avoid sparks and help save both when the engine is not running and can injure
batteries. Tn addition, it could save your radio! you. Keep hands, clothing and toolsaway from
any underhood electric fan.

5-3
 5. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock.
The vehicles could be damaged too.
Using a match near a battery can cause battery Before you connect the cables, here are some basic
gas toexplode. People have been hurt doing this, things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) and negative (-) will go to negative (-)
and some have been blinded.Use a flashlight if
or a metal engine part. Don’t connect positive (+) to
you need more light. negative (-) or you’ll get ashort that would damage
Be sure the batteries have enough water. You the battery and maybe other parts too.
don’t need to add water to the Delco Freedom@
battery (or batteries) installed in every new GM
vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be sure
the right amountof fluid is there. If it low,is add
A CAUTION:
water to take care of that first.If you don’t, Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you
explosive gas couldbe present. badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you. once the enginesare running.
Don’t get it onyou. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with
water and get medical help immediately.

5-4
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+) 7. Don’t let the other end
terminal of the vehicle with the dead battery. Use a touch metal. Connect it
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. to the positive (+)
terminal of the good
u

battery. Use a remote

positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one.

5-5
 8. Now connect the
black negative (-) cable
to the good battery’s
negative (-) cable.

Don’t let the other end touch anything until the next
step. The otherend of the negative (-) cable doesn’t go
to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy unpainted metal 9. Attach the cable at least 18 inches (45 ctn) away
part of the vehicle with the dead battery. from the dead battery, but not near engine parts that
move. The electrical connection is just as good
there, but the chance of sparks getting back to the
battery is much less.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine forawhile.
1 1. Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery.
If it won’t start after a few tries, it probably
needs service.

5-6
12. Remove the cables in reverse order to prevent Towing Your Vehicle
electrical shorting.Take care that they don’t touch
each other orany other metal. Try to have your GM dealer or aprofessional towing
service tow your vehicle. See “Roadside Assistance’’
in the Index.
If your vehicle has been changed since it was
factory-new, by adding such things as fog lamps,
aero skirting, or special tires and wheels, these
instructions may not be correct.
Before you do anything, turn on the hazard
warning flashers.
When you call, tell the towing service:
0 That your vehicle has rear-wheel drive, or that it has
the four-wheel-drive option.
0 The make, model and year of your vehicle.
0 Whether you can move the shift lever for the
transmission and transfer case, if you have one.
A. Heavy Metal Engine Part
0 If there was an accident, what was damaged.
B. Good Battery
When the towing service arrives, let the tow operator
C. Dead Battery know that this manual contains detailed towing
instructions and illustrations. The operator may want to
see them.

5-7
 To help avoid injury toyou or others: A vehicle can fall from a car carrierif it isn’t
Never let passengers ride in a vehicle that is adequately secured. This can causecollision,
a
being towed. serious personal injury and vehicle damage. The
Never tow faster than safe or posted speeds. vehicle should be tightly securedwith chains or
Never tow with damaged parts not steel cables before is
it transported.
fully secured. Don’t use substitutes (ropes, leather straps,
Never get under yourvehicle after it has canvas webbing,etc.) that can be cutby sharp
been lifted by the tow truck. edges underneath thetowed vehicle.
Always use separate safety chains on each
side when towinga vehicle.
For pickups (except cab chassismodels), When your vehicle is being towed, hav.e the ignition
key in the OFF position. The steering wheel should be
use T-hooks on front of vehicle, J-hooks
clamped in a straight-ahead position, with a clamping
on rear. device designed for towing service. Do not use the
For cab chassis models, use J-hooks on vehicle’s steering column lock for this. The transmission
front and rearof vehicle. and transfer case, if you have one, should be in
NEUTRAL (N) and the parking brake released.
Don’t have your vehicle towed on the drive wheels
unless you must. If the vehicle must be towed on the
drive wheels, be sure to follow the speed and distance
restrictions later in this section or your transmission will
be damaged. If these limitations must be exceeded, then
the drive wheels have to be supported on a dolly.
5-8
Front Towing Rear Towing
Tow Limits -- 35 mph (56 k d h ) , 50 miles (80 km)
If these limits must be
exceeded, then the rear wheels
have to be supported on a dolly.

NOTICE:
Towing pickupmodels from the rear while loaded
with heavy cargo may cause the frame siderails
to flex sufficiently to allow the pickup boxto
contact thecab and could cause damage to the
cab and/or box.

5-9
Engine Ove,rheating
(Gasoline Engine) A CAUTION:
You will find a coolant temperatlJre gage on your
vehicle’s instrument panel. If your vehicle has a Steam from an overheated engine can burn you
diesel engine, see “Engine Overheating” in the Diesel badly, evenif you just open thehood. Stay away
Engine Supplement. from the engineif you see or hear steam coming
from it. Just turn itoff and get everyoneaway
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine from the vehicle until it cools down. Waituntil
there is no signof steam or coolant before
opening the hood.
If you keep driving when your engineis
overheated, the liquidsin it can catch fire. You
or others could be badly burned. Stop yourengine
if it overheats,and get out of the vehicle until the
engine is cool.

NOTICE:
If your engine catches fire because
you keep
driving with no coolant, yourvehicle can be
badly damaged. Thecostly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.

5-10
If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine If you no longer have the overheat warning,you can drive.
Just to be safe, drive slowerfor about 10 minutes. If the
If you get the overheat warning but see or hear no warning doesn’t come back on, you can drive normally.
steam, the problem may not be too serious.Sometimes
the engine can get a little too hot when you: If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your
vehicle right away.
0 Climb a long hill on a hot day.
If there’s still no sign of steam, push the accelerator
0 Stop after high-speed driving. until the engine speed is about twice as fast as normal
0 Idle for long periods in traffic. idle speed. Bring the engine speed back to normal idle
speed after two or three minutes. Now see if the warning
0 Tow a trailer. See “Driving on Grades” in the Index.
stops. But then, if you still have the warning, turn off
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam, the engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it
try this for a minute or so: cools
, .. down.
1. If you have an air conditioner, turn it off. You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan help right away.
speed and open the window as necessary.
3. If you’re in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N);
otherwise, shift to the highest gear while
driving -- AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (@)
or THIRD (3) for automatic transmissions.

5-11
Cooling System -- Gasoline Engines
When you decide it's safe to lift the hood, here's what ,A\ CAUTION:
you'll see:
If your vehicle has air conditioning, the auxiliary
electric fan under the hoodcan start up even
when the engineis not running and can injure
you. Keep hands, clothingand tools away from
any underhood electric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling,

don't do anything else until it cools down.

A. Coolant Recovery Tank

B. Radiator Pressure Cap
C. Engine Fan(s)

5-12
 A CAUTION:
Heater and radiatorhoses, and otherengine
parts, canbe very hot.Don’t touch them. If you
do, you can be burned.
Don’t run the engine if there is a leak. If you run
the engine, it could loseall coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, andyou could beburned.
Get any leak fixed beforeyou drive thevehicle.

The coolant levelshould be at orabove the COLD mark.

If it isn’t,you may have a leakin the radiator hoses,
heater hoses, radiator, water pump orsomewhere else in
the cooling system.

5-13
I NOTICE: A CAUTION:
Engine damage from running your engine Adding only plain water to your cooling system
without coolantisn’t covered by your warranty. can be dangerous. Plain water,or some other
liquid like alcohol, canboil before the proper
If there seems to be no leak, start the engine again. See coolant mix will. Your vehicle’s coolant warning
if the fan speed increases when idle speed is doubled by system is set for the proper coolantmix. With
pushing the accelerator pedal down. If it doesn’t, your plain water or the wrong mix, your engine could
vehicle needs service. Turn off the engine. get too hot butyou wouldn’t get the overheat
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant warning. Your engine could catch fire and you or
others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mix of clean
Recovery Tank
water and DEX-COOL antifreeze.
TM

If you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolant level

isn’t at or above the COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture
of clean water (preferably distilled) and DEX-COOL TM

(orange-colored, silicate-free) antifreeze at the coolant

recovery tank. (See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for
more information.)
I NOTICE: ~ ~~ ~ ~ ~- ~-

In cold weather, water can freeze and crack

the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mix.

5-14
 You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts arehot
enough. Don’t spillcoolant on a hot engine.

When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at or

above the COLD mark, start your vehicle.
If the overheat warning continues, there’s one more
thing you can try. You can add the proper coolant mix
directly to the radiator, but be sure the cooling system is
cool before you do it.

5-15
 Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burnyou badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator
-- --
pressure cap even a little they can come out
at high'speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap, is hot. Waitfor thecooling systemand
radiator pressure cap tocool if you ever have to
turn the pressure cap.

5-16
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator

2. Then keep turning the pressure cap, but now push

down as you turn it. Remove the pressure cap.
I . You can remove the radiator pressure cap when
the cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot. Turn
the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until it
first stops. (Don’t press down while turning the
pressure cap.)
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means
there is still some pressure left.

5-17
 3. Fill the radiator with the
proper mix, up to the
base of the filler neck.

4. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the

COLD mark.
5. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank, but
leave the radiator pressure cap off.

5-18
 6. Start the engine and let it
run until you can feel the
upper radiator hose . .

getting hot. Watch out 1

for the engine fan(s).

7. By this time the coolant level inside the radiator

filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper mix through the filler neck until 8. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during
the level reaches the base of the filler neck. this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the
filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure the
arrows on the pressure cap line up like this.

5-19
Engine Fan Noise If a Tire Goes Flat
Your vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan. When the It’s unusual for a tire to “blow out” while you’re driving,
clutch is engaged, the fan spins faster to provide more air especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes
to cool the engine. In most every day driving conditions, out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly.
the fan is spinning slower and the clutch is not fully But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a few
engaged. This improves fuel economy and reduces fan tips about what to expect and what to do:
noise. Under heavy vehicle loading, trailer towing and/or If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
high outside temperatures, the fan speed increases as the pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
clutch more fully engages. So you may hear an increase accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
in fan noise. This is normal and shouldnot be mistaken Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
as the transmission slipping or making extra shifts. It is a stop well out of the traffic lane.
merely the cooling system functioning properly. The fan
will slow down when additional cooling is not required A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like
and the clutch partially disengages. a skid and may require the same correction you’d use in
a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the
You may also hear this fan noise when you start accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
the engine. It will go away as the fan clutch steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
partially disengages. very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop -- well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your
jacking equipment to change a flat tiresafely.

5-20
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goesflat, avoid further tireand wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your hazard To be even more certain thevehicle won't move,
warning flashers. ' you can put blocks at the front and rearof the
tire farthestaway from theone being changed.

A CAUTION: That would be the tire on the other

vehicle, at the opposite end.
side of the

Changing a tire cancause an injury. Thevehicle

can slip off the jack androll over you or other
people. You and they could be badly injured.
Find a level place to change your tire.To help
prevent thevehicle from moving:
1. Set the parkingbrake firmly.
2. Put an automatic, transmission shift lever in
PARK (P) or shift a manual transmission to t. i

FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R).

3. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle,
be sure the transfer case is in a drive
--
gear not inNEUTRAL (N).
4. Tbrn off the engine.
CAUTION: (Continued)
The following stepswill tell you how to use the jackand
change atire.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools

Extended Cab Models

The equipment you’ll need is behind the passenger’sseat.
2 and 4-DOOr Models
Turn the wing nut counterclockwise and remove thejack
cover, if there is one. Remove thejacking equipment.
If you have a chassis cab, refer to the information from the
body supplier/installer for the locationof your spare tire.
I f you have an underbody-mounted spare, never remove
or restow a tire from an underbody carrier while the
vehicle is supported only by a jack.
You’ll use the jack handle and the ratchet to remove the
underbody-mounted spare tire.

5-22
 Lower Raise Follow these instructions tolower the spare tire:
1. One side of the ratchet has an UP marking. The
other side has a DOWN marking. Assemble the
ratchet to the hook near the end of the jack handle
(as illustrated) with the DOWN marking facing you.
Insert the other end through the hole in the rear
bumper and into the hoist shaft.
H
u 2. Turn the ratchet to lower the spare tire to the ground.
Continue to turn the ratchet until the spare tire can be
pulled out from under the vehicle.
3. When the tire has been lowered, tilt the retainer at
the end of the cable so it can be pulled up through
the wheel opening.
A. Hoist Assembly E Spare Tire 4. Put the spare tire near the flat tire.
B. Ratchet G . Retainer
C. Jack Handle H. Hoist Cable
D. Hoist Shaft
E. Valve Stem,
Pointed Down

- 5-23
 With the UP marking on
the ratchet facing you,
The tools you’ll be using include the jack (A), the jack
rotate the ratchet clockwise.
handle extension (B), the jack handle (C), the wheel
That will lift the jack head
wrench (D) and the ratchet (E).
a little.
If the flat tireis on the rear of the vehicle, you’ll need
the jackhandle extension also.

5-24
 If your vehicle has wheel Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
nut caps, use the wheel the Spare Tire
wrench and ratchet to
remove them. Turn the I . Use the ratchet and
wheel wrench wheel wrench to loosen
counterclockwise, with all the wheel nuts. Turn
DOWN facing you, to the wheel wrench
remove the wheel nut caps. counterclockwise, with
DOWN facing you, to
loosen the wheel nuts.
Don't remove the wheel
nuts yet.

Then take off the hub cap.

If the wheel also has a trim ring, use the wheel wrench
to pry along the edge and remove it.
2. Position the jack under the vehicle.
If the wheel has a smooth center piece or a center piece
with recessed nuts, place the wheel wrench in the slot on
the wheel and gently pry out.

Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is

dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injuredor killed. Never get under
a vehicle whenit is supported onlyby a jack.

5-25
I NOTICE:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned will damage the vehicleor may allow
the vehicleto fall off thejack. Be sure tofit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising your vehicle.
Front Rear
Position Position

3. With UP on the ratchet facing you, raise the vehicle

by rotating the ratchet and wheel wrench clockwise.
Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so there
is enough room for the spare tire to fit.

Front Position Rear Position

5-26
 i
4. Remove all the wheel I
nuts and take off the
flat tire.
A CAUTION:
Rust or dirton the wheel, or on theparts to
which it is fastened, can make ,thewheel nuts
become looseafter a time. The wheel could come
off and cause an accident. When you change a
wheel, remove any rust or’dirtfrom theplaces
where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an
emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel
to dothis; but be sure to use a scraper orwire
brush later,if you need to, to get all the rust or
5 , Remove any rust or dirt dirt off.
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces and
spare wheel.

A CAUTION:
Never use oilor grease on studs ornuts. If you
do, the nutsmight come loose. Your wheel could
fall off, causing a serious accident.

5-27
 ~~~

6. Replace the wheel nuts 8. Tighten the nuts

with the rounded end of firmly in a criss-cross
the nuts toward the 4 0 sequence as shown by
wheel. Tighten each rotating the wheel
wheel nut by hand using wrench clockwise.
the wheel wrench until
the wheel is held against
the hub.

I
A CAI.
-JTION:
Incorrect whlee1 nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose
and even come off. This could lead to an accident.
Be sure touse the correct wheel nuts. If you have
to replace them, be sure to newget GM original
equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere assoon as you can and have the
nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
Position
Position
Rear
Front proper torque. See “Capacities and
7. Lower the vehicle by rotating the ratchet and wheel Specifications” in the Index.
wrench counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
5-28
 Store the flat tire where the spare tire was stored.
NOTICE: For an underbody spare tirecarrier, stow the tire under
the rear of the vehicle in the spare tirecarrier. To stow
Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to the tire:
brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid 1. Put the tire on the ground at the rear of the vehicle
expensive brake repairs, evenly tightenthe wheel with the valve stem pointed down and to the rear.
nuts in the propersequence and to the proper
torque specification. 2. Tilt the retainer downward and through the wheel
opening. Make sure that the retainer is fully seated
across the underside of the wheel.
9. Put the wheel trim back on. For vehicles with plastic 3. Attach the ratchet, with the UP mark facing you,
wheel nut caps, tighten the caps until they are finger near the hook at the end of the jack handle. Insert the
tight, then tighten them an additional one-half turn other end,on an angle, throughthe hole in the rear
with the ratchet and wheel wrench. bumper and into the hoist shaft.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools 4. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the
vehicle. Continue turning the ratchet until there are
1 two “clicks” or “ratchets.” The spare tirehoist
A CAUTION: cannot be over-tightened.
5 . Grasp and push against the tire to be sure it is stored
Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in the securely and does not move.
passenger compartment of the vehiclecould
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these
in the proper place.

5-29
 Lower Raise

-*-* C

H
u
G
E
F-

A. Hoist Assembly E. Valve Stem, 2 and 4-DOOr Models

B. Ratchet Pointed Down
A. Nut E. Jack and Tool
C. Jack Handle E Flat or Spare Tire Storage Box
B. Jack
D. Hoist Shaft G. Retainer E Ratchet
C. Jack Handle
H. Hoist Cable Extension G. Jack Handle
Return the jack, ratchet, wheel wrench andjack extensions D. Wheel Wrench H. Tool Retainer
to their location behind the passenger’s seat. Secure the
items and replace the jack cover, if there is one.

5-30
 C

E
I
F F

Extended Cab Models Chassis CabModels

A. Nut E. Jack and Tool A. Nut E Jack and Tool

B. Jack and Tool Storage Box B. Retainer Storage Box
Cover E Ratchet C. Jack Handle G. Ratchet
C. Jack Handle G. Wheel Wrench Extension H. Jack Handle
Extension H. Jack D. Jack Handle I. Tool Retainer
D. Tool Retainer I. Jack Handle Extension J. Jack
E. Wheel Wrench

5-31
If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow I NOTICE: I
What you don’t want to dowhen your vehicle is stuck Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your
is to spin your wheels too fast. Themethod known as vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin thewheels
“rocking’”can help you get out when you’re s,tuck, but too fast while shifting your transmission back
you must use caution.
and forth,you can destroy your transmission.

I A CAUTION:, For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,

see “Tire Chains” in the Index.
If you letyour tires spinat high speed, theycan
explode, and you or others could be injured. .

And, the transmission or other partsof the

vehicle can overheat. That could causean engine
compartment fireor otherdamage. When you’re
stuck, spin the wheels as littleas possible. Don’t
spin thewheels above35 mph (55 km/h) as shown
on the speedometer.

5-32
Rocking your vehicle to get it out: Using the Recovery Hooks
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will
clear the area around your front wheels. Then shift back
and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear (or
with a manual transmission, between FIRST (1) or
SECOND (2) and REVERSE(R)), spinning the wheels
as little as possible. Releasethe accelerator pedal while
you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal
when the transmission is in gear. If that doesn’t get you
out after a few tries, you may need to be towed out. Or,
you can use your recovery hooks if your vehicle has
them. If you do need to be towed out, see “Towing Your
Vehicle” in the Index.

Your vehicle may be equipped with recovery hooks.

The recovery hooks are provided at the front of your
vehicle. You may need to use them if you’re stuck
off-road and need to be pulled to some place where
you can continue driving.

5-33
 ’ A CAUTION:
The recovery hooks, when used, are under a lot of
force. Always pull the vehicle straight
out. Never
pull on the hooksat a sideways angle. The hooks
could break off and you or others couldbe
injured from the chain or cable snapping back.

I
I NOTICE:
I
Never use the recovery hooksto tow the vehicle.
Your vehicle could bedamaged and it would not
be covered by warranty.

5-34
 Section 6 Service and Appearance Care

Here you will find information about the care of your We hope you’ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
vehicle. This section beginswith service and fuel Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
information, and then it shows how to check important
fluid and lubricant levels. There is also technical
information about your vehicle, and a part devoted to
n
its appearance care.
Service
Your GM dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you
to be happy with it. We hope you’ll go to your dealer for
@Elv Delco
all your service needs. You’ll get genuine GM parts and
GM-trained and supported service people. Doing Your Own Service Work
If you want to do some of your own service work, you’ll
want to get the proper service manual. It tells you much
more about how to service your vehicle than this manual
can. To order the proper service manual, see “Service
and Owner Publications” in the Index.

6-1
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to Fuel (Gasoline Engine)
do your own service work, see “Servicing Your Air
Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index. If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see “Diesel Fuel
Requirements and Fuel System” in the Diesel Engine
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list Supplement. For vehicles with gasoline engines, please
the mileage and the date of any service work you read this.
perform. See “Maintenance.Record” in the Index.
Use regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane
or higher. At a minimum, it should meet specifications
ASTM D48 14 in the United States and CGSB 3.5-M93
in Canada. Improved gasoline specifications have
been developed by the American Automobile
You can be injured and your vehicle could be Manufacturers Association (AAMA) for better vehicle
damaged if you tryto do service work ona performance and engine protection. Gasolines meeting
vehicle without knowing enough aboutit. the AAMA specification could provide improved
Be sure you have sufficient knowledge, driveability and emission control system protection
experience, and the proper replacement compared to other gasolines.
parts and tools beforeyou attempt any Be sure the posted octane is at least 87. If the octane is
vehicle maintenance task. less than 87, you may get aheavy knocking noise when
Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and you drive. If it’s bad enough, it can damage your engine.
other fasteners. ‘(English” and “metric” If you’re using fuel rated at 87 octane orhigher and you
fasteners can be easily confused.If you use still hear heavy knocking, your engine needs service.
the wrong fasteners, parts can later break But don’t worry if you hear a little pinging noise when
or fall off. You could be hurt. you’re accelerating or driving up a hill. That’s normal,
and you don’t have to buy a higher octane fuel to get rid
of pinging. It’s the heavy, constant knock that means
you have a problem.

6-2
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission To provide cleaner air, all gasolines are now required to
Standards (indicated on the underhood tune-up label), it contain additives that will help prevent deposits from
is designed to operate on fuels that meet California forming in your engine and fuel system, allowingyour
specifications. If such fuels are not available in states emission control system to functionproperly. Therefore,
adopting California emissions standards,your vehicle you should not have to add anything to the fuel. In
will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal addition, gasolines containing oxygenates,such as ethers
specifications, but emission control system performance and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be
may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp on available in your area to help clean the air. General
your instrument panel may turn on and/or your vehicle Motors recommends that you use these gasolinesif they
may fail a smog-check test. If this occurs, return to your comply with the specifications described earlier.
authorized GM dealer for diagnosisto determine the
cause of failure. In the event it is determined that the
cause of the condition is the type of fuels used, repairs NOTICE:
may not be covered by your warranty. I

In Canada, some gasolines contain an octane-enhancing Your vehicle was not designedfor fuel that
additive called MMT. If you use such fuels, your contains methanol. Don’tuse it. It can corrode
emission control system performance may deteriorate metal parts in your fuel system and also damage
and the malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument plastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldn’t
panel may turn on. I f this happens, return to your be covered under your warranty.
authorized GM dealer for service.

6-3
Fuels in Foreign Countries-- Gasoline Filling Your Tank
Engines The fuel cap is behind a
If you plan on driving in another country outside the hinged door on the left side
United States orCanada, the proper fuel may be hard to of your vehicle.
find. Never use leaded gasoline orany other fuel not
recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly repairs
caused by use of improper ‘fuelwouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
To check on fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you’ll be driving.
You can also write us at the followingaddress for
advice. Just tell us where you’re going and give your
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). On a chassis-cab model, refuel the front tank first, or in
General Motors Overseas Distribution Corporation, instances when only a partial fuel fill is desired.
North American Export Sales (NAES)
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

6-4
I A CAUTION: -
Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. It burns If you get gasoline on yourself and then
violently, and that can cause very bad injuries. something ignites it,you could be badly burned.
Don’t smoke if you’re near gasoline or refueling Gasoline can spray out on you if you open the
your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking l fuel filler captoo quickly. This spray can happen
materials away from gasoline. if your tank is nearly full, and is morelikely in
i hot weather. Open the fuel filler cap slowly and
wait for any “hiss”noise to stop.Then unscrew
While refueling, hang the the cap all theway.
cap inside the fuel door.

To take off the cap, turn it slowly to the left

(counterclockwise).

6-5
Be careful not to spill gasoline. Clean gasoline from Checking Things Under theHood
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See “Cleaning the
Outside of Your Vehicle” in the Index.
When you put the cap back on, turn it to the right until
you hear at least three clicks. Make sureyou fully install
A CAUTION:
the cap. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel If your vehicle has air conditioning, the auxiliary
cap has been left off or improperlyinstalled. This would engine fan under the hood can start up and
allow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. See
injure you even when the engine is not running.
“Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in the Index.
Keep hands, clothing andtools away from any

I NOTICE: underhood electric fan.

If you need a n e w cap, be sure to get the right

for If you get
type. Your dealer can get one you.
the wrong type, it may not orfithave proper
venting, and your fuel tank and emissions system
Things that burn canget on hotengine parts and
might be damaged.
start a fire. These include liquidslike gasoline or
diesel fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield
washer and other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You
or otherscould be burned. Be careful not todrop
or spill things that will burn ontoa hot engine.

6-6
Hood Release
To open the hood, first pull
the handle inside the
vehicle.

i.

Then go to the front of the vehicle and pull up on the

secondary hood release, located just to the passenger
side of the center of the grill.
Lift the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all filler caps are on
properly. Pull down the hood and close it firmly.

6-7
VORTEC” 4300,5000,5700 Engine
When you lift up the hood you’ll see:

“VORTEC” 5700 engine shown, locations for other engines similar.

6-8
A. Battery H. Fan
B. Air Cleaner I. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
C. Radiator Cap J. Engine Oil Fill
D. Coolant Recovery Tank K. Brake Fluid Reservoir
E. Air Filter Restriction Indicator L. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir
F. Engine Oil Dipstick M. Fuse/Relay Center
G. Automatic Transmission Dipstick N. Storage Compartment

6-9
“VORTEC” 7400 Engine

A. Battery E Engine Oil Dipstick K. Brake Fluid Reservoir

B. Coolant Recovery Tank G. Automatic Transmission Dipstick L. Storage Compartment
C. Air Cleaner H. Engine Oil Fill M. Windshield Washer
D. Radiator Cap I. Fan Fluid Reservoir
E. Air Filter Restriction Indicator J. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir N. Fuse/Relay Center

6-10
Noise Control System 2. The use of the vehicle after such device or element
of design has been removed or rendered inoperative
The following information relates to compliance with by any person.
Federal noise emission standards for vehicles with a
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) of more than Among those acts presumed to constitute tampering are
10,000 Ibs. (4 536 kg). The Maintenance Schedule the acts listed below.
booklet provides information on maintaining the noise Insulation:
control system to minimize degradation of the noise
emission control system during the life of your vehicle. 0 Removal of noise shields or underhood insulation.
The noise control system warranty is given in your Engine:
Warranty booklet.
0 Removal or rendering engine speed governor (if so
These standards apply only to vehicles sold in the equipped) inoperativeso as to allow engine speed to
United States. exceed manufacturer specifications.
Tampering WithNoise Control ran and Drive:
System Prohibited 0 Removal of fan clutch (if so equipped) or rendering
clutch inoperative.
Federal law prohibits the following acts or the
causing thereof Removal of fan shroud (if so equipped).
1. The removal or rendering inoperative by any person, Air Intake:
other than for purposes of maintenance, repair or 0 Removal of air cleaner silencer.
replacement, of any device orelement of design
incorporated into any new vehicle for the purpose of 0 Reversing air cleaner cover.
noise control, prior to its sale or delivery to the Exhaust:
ultimate purchaser or while it is in use; or
0 Removal of muffler and/or resonator.
0 Removal of exhaust pipes and exhaust pipe clamps.

6-11
 Turn off the engine and give the oil a few minutes to
Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine) drain back into the oil pan. If you don’t, the oil dipstick
If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see “Engine Oil might not show the actual level.
(Diesel Engine)” in the Diesel Engine Supplement.
It’s a good idea tocheck your engine oilevery time you
Checking Engine Oil
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or
be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground. cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again,
keeping the tip down, and check the level.

The engine oildipstick has a yellow ring handle and is

located on the passenger side of the engine.

6-12
When to Add Oil The engine oil fill cap
for the 4.3L, 5.0L and the
If the oil is at or below the ADD mark, then you’ll need 5.7L engine is located on
to add some oil. But you must use the right kind. This the driver’s side engine
part explains what kind of oil to use. For crankcase valve cover.
capacity, see “Capacities and Specifications” in the Index.

I NOTICE:

r
~~~

Don’t add too much oil.If your engine has so

much oil that the oil levelgets above the upper
mark thatshows the properoperating range,
your engine could be damaged. The engine oil fill cap for the 7.4L engine is located at
the front of the engine.
Just fill it enough to put the level somewhere in the
proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the way
back in when you‘re through.

6-13
 -
~.

What Kind of Oil to Use RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS
Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identified by FOR BEST FUEL ECONOMY AND COLD STARTING, SELECT THE LOWEST
looking forthe “Starburst” symbol. This symbol -
SAL VISCOSITY GRADE OIL FOR THE EXPECTED TEMPERATURE RANGE.
~.
indicates that the oil has been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). Do not use any oil which
does not carry this Starburst symbol.
WOK
HOT FOR THIS
WEATHER SYMBOL
If you change your own oil,
be sure you use oil that has “C
the Starburst symbol on the + 30
front of the oil container.
+ 27

+ 16

+4

-7

- 18

If you have your oil changed for you, be sure the oil put
into your engine is American Petroleum Institute SAE SW-30
PREFERRED
certified for gasoline engines.
You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your
vehicle, as shown in the following chart: WEATHER
DO NOT USE SAE 2OW-50 OR ANY OTHER
GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED

6-14
As shown in the chart, SAE 5W-30 is best for your When to Change Engine Oil
vehicle. However, you can use SAE IOW-30 if it’s going
See if any one of these is true for you:
to be 0”F (- 18°C) or above. These numbers on an oil
container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use 0 Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km).
other viscosity oils, such as SAE 20W-50. This is particularly important when outside
temperatures are below freezing.

I NOTICE: Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent

driving in stop-and-go traffic).
Use only engineoil with the American Petroleum 0 You operate your vehicle in dusty areas or
Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines off-road frequently.
“Starburst” symbol. Failureto use the 0 You frequently tow a trailer.
recommended oil can result inengine damage not 0 The vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi
covered by your warranty. or othercommercial application.
Driving under these conditions causes engineoil to
GM Goodwrench@ oil meets all the requirements for break down sooner. If any one of these is true for your
your vehicle. vehicle, then you need to change your oil and filter
every 3,000 miles ( 5 000 km) or 3 months -- whichever
Engine Oil Additives occurs first.
Don’t add anything to your oil. Your GM dealer is ready If none of them is true, change the oil and filter every
to advise if you think something should be added. 7,500 miles (12 500 km) or 12 months -- whichever
occurs first. Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed
engine under highway conditions causes engineoil to
break down slower.

6-15
What to Do with Used Oil Air Cleaner
Did you know that used engine oil contains certain
elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could
even cause cancer?Don’t let used oil stay on your skin
for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and
water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly throw
away clothing or rags containing used engine oil.(See
the manufacturer’s warnings about the use and disposal
of oil products.)
Used oil can be a real threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all free-flowing oil
from the filter before disposal. Don’t ever disposeof oil
by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into
sewers, or into streams or bodiesof water. Instead,
recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil. I f
you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil,
ask your dealer, a service station or alocal recycling Your air cleaner is located between the battery and
center forhelp. coolant recovery tank.

6-16
 The air cleaner assembly
has an indicator that lets
you know when the air filter
is dirty and needs to be
serviced. The indicator is
located in the air intake tube
between the air cleanerand
the engine.

See “Owner Checks and Services” in the Index on when

to check the indicator.
If the area inside the clear section of the indicator is
green, no air filter service is required. When the area To remove the air filter, unhook the retaining clips and
inside the indicator is orange and CHANGE AIR remove the cover. Lift the filter and the connected duct
FILTER appears, the filter should be replaced. out of the air cleanerhousing. Hold the duct and remove
the filter by both pulling and twisting the filter away
fram the duct. Care should be taken to dislodge as little
dirt as possible.
Clean the filter sealing surface of the duct and the
filter housing.

6-17
 Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to
replace the air filter.
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.

~ Operating the engine with the air cleaner off can

cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner
’ not only cleans the air, it stops flame
if the engine
backfires. If it isn’t there,and the engine
backfires, you could be burned.Don’t drive with
it off, and be careful working on the engine with
Install the new filter by pushing it all the way to the stop the air cleaner off.
on the duct.
Install the duct and the filter into the air cleaner housing.
Make sure that the duct fits properly into the housing.
Install the cover and fasten the two retaining clips.
NOTICE:
After the air filteris properly serviced, the indicator If the air cleaneris off, a backfire can cause
a
should be reset. Push the button on top of the indicator damaging enginefire. And, dirt caneasily get
to reset it to the green (clean) filter zone. into your engine,which will damage it. Always
have the air cleaner in place when you’re driving.

6-18
Automatic Transmission Fluid If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
When to Check and Change
A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid NOTICE: __
level is when the engine oil is changed. -. .- . - ~-
--

Change both the fluid and filter every50,000 miles Too much or too little fluid can damage your
(83 000 km) if the vehicle’s GVWR is over 8,600 or transmission. Too much can mean that some of
if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
these conditions: parts orexhaust system parts,starting a fire. Be
0 In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature sure to get an accurate readingif you check your
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) orhigher. transmission fluid.
0 In hilly or mountainous terrain.
0 When doing frequent trailer towing. Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
0 Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
0 When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
If your vehicle’s GVWR is not over 8,600and you do
not use your vehicle under any of these conditions,the 0 At high speed for quite a while.
fluid and filter do not require changing. In heavy traffic -- especially in hot weather.
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index. 0 While pulling a trailer.
How to Check To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F (82°C
Because this operationcan be a little difficult, you to 93°C).
may choose to have this done at your GM dealership
Service Department.

6-19
 .
Checking Transmission FluidHot three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift
lever in PARK (P).
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles
(24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50°F Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more.
(10°C). If it's colder than 50°F (IO'C), drive the Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:
vehicle in DRIVE (D) until the engine temperature
gage moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes.
Then follow the hot check procedures.
Checking Transmission Fluid Cold
A cold check is made after the vehicle has been sitting
for eighthours or more with the engine off and is used
only as a reference. Let the engine run at idle for five
minutes if outside temperatures are 50°F ( 10°C) or
more. If it's colder than 50°F (IO'C), you may have to
idle the engine longer. Should the fluid level be low
during acold check, you nzust perform a hot check
before adding fluid. This will give you a more accurate
reading of the fluid level.
Checking the FluidHot or Cold
Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the The red transmission dipstick handle is located at the
engine running. rear of the engine compartment, on the passenger side.
I . Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick and
0 With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P). wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.

With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift 2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
lever through each gear range, pausing for about then pull it back out again.

6-20
 How to Add Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transmission fluid touse. See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid
HOT. (A COLD check is used only as a reference.) If
the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper
fluid to bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot
check. It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less than a
pint (0.5 L). Don’t ove$iZZ. We recommend you use only
fluid labeled DEXRON@-111,because fluid with that
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower label is made especially for your automatic transmission.
level. The fluid level must be in the COLD area fora Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON-I11 isnot
cold check or in the HOT area orcross-hatched area covered by your new vehicle warranty.
for ahot check.
After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
4. If the fluid level isin the acceptable range, push the described under “How to Check.”
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flipthe handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.

6-21
Manual Transmission Fluid Check the fluid level only when your engine is off, the
vehicle is parked on a level place and the transmission
When to Check is cool enough for you to rest your fingers on the
transmission case.
A good time to have it checked is when the engine
oil is changed. However, the fluid in your manual Then, follow these steps:
transmission doesn’t require changing,

How to Check
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you
may choose to have this done at your GM dealership
Service Department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the
instructions here, or you could get a false reading.

I NOTICE:
Too much or too little fluidcan damage your
transmission. Too much can mean that someof
the fluid could come out and fall on engine
hot 1. Remove the filler plug.
parts or exhaust system parts, startinga fire. Be
2. Check that the lubricant level is up to the bottom of
sure to getan accurate reading if you check your the filler plug hole.
transmission fluid.
3. If the fluid level is good, install the plug and be sure
it is fully seated. If the fluid level is low, add more
fluid as described in the next steps.
6-22
How to Add Fluid When to Check and Whatto Use
Here’s how to add fluid. Refer to the Maintenance Refer to the Maintenance
Schedule to determine what kind of fluid to use. See Schedule, Owner Checks
“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index. and Services, to determine
1. Remove the filler plug. how often you should
check the fluid level in
2. Add fluid at the filler plug hole. Add only enough your clutch master cylinder
fluid to bring the fluid levelup to the bottom of the reservoir and for the proper
filler plug hole. fluid. See “Owner
3. Install the filler plug. Be sure the plug is fully seated. Checks and Services” and
“Recommended Fluids and
Hydraulic Clutch Lubricants” in the Index.
The hydraulic clutchsystem in your vehicle is
self-adjusting. A slight amount of play (1/4 inch to
1/2 inch or 6 mm to 12 mm) in the pedal is normal. How to Check
It isn’t a good idea to “top off’ your clutch fluid. The proper fluid should be added if the level does not
Adding fluid won’t correct a leak. A fluid loss in this reach the bottom of the diaphragm when it’s in place in
system could indicate aproblem. Have the system the reservoir. See the instructions on the reservoir cap.
inspected and repaired.

6-23
Rear Axle C3 (3500 HD) Trucks Equipped with
Dana Rear Axle
When to Check and Change Lubricant
Additional rear axle scheduled maintenance is required
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how on 3500 HD models equipped with Dana rear axles
often to check the lubricant and when to change it. See when they are driven under the following conditions:
“Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.
Extreme loading (at or near GVWR) or trailer
How to Check Lubricant towing, and:
Operation above 45 mph (70 km/h) for extenuea
periods of time
Vehicles used in any of these conditions require the
rear axle lubricant be changed every 30,000 miles
I (50 000 km). Fluid capacity is 4.12 quarts (3.9 L).
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See “Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants” in the Index.

If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,

you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.

6-24
Four-wheel Drive How to Check Lubricant
Most lubricant checks in this section also apply to
four-wheel-drive vehicles. However, they have two
additional systems that need lubrication.

Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant. See “PeriodicMaintenance
Inspections” in the Index.

If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,

you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See “Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants” in the Index.

6-25
Front Axle If the differential is at operating temperature (warm),
add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of
When to Check and Change Lubricant the filler plug hole.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how If the differential is cold, add enough lubricant to raise
often to check the lubricant and when to change it. See the level to 1/2 inch ( 1 2 mm) below the filler plug hole.
“Scheduled Maintenance Services” i n the Index.
What to Use
How to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See “Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants” in the Index.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with new
DEX-COOL (orange-colored, silicate-free) engine
TM

coolant. Thiscoolant is designed to remain in your

vehicle for 5 years or 100,000 miles (1 66 000 km),
whichever occurs first.
The following explains your cooling system and how
to add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
with engine overheating, see “Engine Overheating” in
.. . the Index.

If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole.

you’ll need to add some lubricant.

6-26
A 50/50 mixture of water and the proper coolant for What to Use
your vehicle will: Use a mixture of one-half dean water (preferably
0 Give freezing protection down to -34°F (-37°C). distilled) and one-half DEX-COOL (orange-colored,
TM

silicate-free) antifreeze that meets GM Specification

0 Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
6277M, which won’t damage aluminum parts. Use
0 Protect against rust and corrosion. GM Engine Coolant Supplement (sealer) (GM Part
0 Help keep the proper engine temperature. No. 3634621) with any complete coolant change.If you
use this mixture, you don’t need to add anything else.
0 Let the warning gages work as they should.

NOTICE: c
A C *.UTION:
I

When adding coolant it is important that you use Adding only plain water to your cooling system
DEX-COOL (orange-colored, silicate-free)
TM
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
coolant meeting GM Specification 6277111. liquid like alcohol, can boil before the proper
coolant mix will. Your vehicle’s coolant warning
If silicated coolant is added to the system, system is set for the proper coolant mix. With
premature engine, heater core or radiator plain water or the wrong mix, your engine could
corrosion may result. In addition, the engine get too hot butyou wouldn’t get the overheat
coolant will require change sooner at -- warning. Your engine could catch fire and you o r
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or24 months, others could be burned.Use a 50/50 mix of clean
whichever occurs first. water and DEX-COOL (orange-colored,
TM
,
silicate-free) antifreeze.

6-27
 Checking Coolant
I NOTICE: If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see“Checking
Coolant” in the Diesel Engine Supplement,
If you use an improper coolantmix, your engine
B
could overheat and be badly damaged. The
repair cost wouldn’t be coveredby your
warranty. Too much water in themix can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts.

I f you have to add coolant more than four times a year,

have your dealer check your cooling system.

I NOTICE:
If you use the proper coolant,you don’t have to
add extra inhibitors or additiveswhich claim to
improve the system. These can be harmful. The coolant recovery tank is located on the passenger
side at the rear corner of the engine compartment.
When your engine is cold, the coolant level should be at
the COLD mark, or a little higher. When your engine is
warm, the level should be up to the HOT mark, or a
little higher.

6-28
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper mix at the A CAUTION: ' -

coolant recovery tank.

You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
I
I A CAUTION: engine parts. Coolant contains ethyleneglycol,
hot
and itwill burn if the engine parts are
enough. Don't spill coolant on a hot engine.
Turning the radiator pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to
blow out and burnyou
badly. With the coolant recovery tank,
you will
at the radiator.
almost never have to add coolant
--
Never turn the radiator pressure cap even a
--
little when the engine and radiator are hot.

Add coolant mix at the recovery tank, but be careful not

to spill it.

6-29
Radiator Pressure Cap
(Gasoline Engine) NOTICE:
Your radiator cap is a 15 psi (105 kPa)
pressure-type cap and mustbe tightly installed
to prevent coolant loss and possible engine
damage from overheating. Be sure the arrows
on the cap lineup with the overflow tube on the
radiator filler neck.

Thermostat
Engine coolant temperature is controlled by a thermostat
in the engine coolant system. The thermostat stops the
flow of coolant through the radiator until the coolant
reaches a preset temperature.
When you replace your thermostat, an AC@thermostat
The radiator pressure cap must be tightly installed with is recommended.
the arrows on the cap lined up with the overflow tube on
the radiator filler neck.

6-30
Power Steering Fluid How To Check Power Steering Fluid
When the engine compartment is cool, unscrew the cap
I and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag. Replace the cap
and completely tighten it. Then remove the cap again
and look at the fluid level on the dipstick.
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark. I f
necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level up
to the mark.

What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of fluid to use. See “Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants” in the Index. Always use the proper fluid.
Failure to use the proper fluid can cause leaks and
damage hoses and seals.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering Windshield Washer Fluid
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system What to Use
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
and repaired. the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will be
operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature
may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient
protection against freezing.

6-31
Adding Washer Fluid
NOTICE:
0 When using concentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
adding water.
0 Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer
fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze
and damage your washer fluid tank and
other partsof the washer system. Also,
water doesn’t clean aswell as washer fluid.
0 Fill your washer fluid tankonly
three-quarters full whenit’s very cold. This
allows for expansion,which could damage
the tankif it is completely full.
Open the cap labeled WASHER FLUID ONLY. Add a Don’t use radiator antifreeze in your
washer-fluid until the tank is full. windshield washer. It can damage your
washer system and paint.

6-32
Brakes So, it isn’t a good idea to “top off’ your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak. If you add fluid
Brake Fluid when your linings are worn, then you’ll have too much
fluid when you get new brake linings. You should add
Your brake master cylinder (or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is
reservoir is here. It is filled done on the brake hydraulic system.
with DOT-3 brake fluid.

1 A CAUTION:
If you have too much brakefluid, it can‘spill
will burn if the engine
on the engine. The fluid
is hot enough.You or others could be burned,
and your vehiclecould be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when workis done on the brake
hydraulic system.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the
reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake fluid
goes down to an acceptable level during normal brake Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to
lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid level check your brake fluid. See“Periodic Maintenance
goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out Inspections” in the Index.
of the brake system. If it is, you should have your brake
system fixed, sincea leak means that sooner or later your
brakes won’t work well, or won’t work at all.

6-33
Checking Brake Fluid After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,
make sure the level is above MIN and below the top
of the window.

What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3
brake fluid -- such as Delco Supreme 1 1 (GM Part
@

No. 1052535). Use new brake fluid from a sealed

container only, and always clean the brake fluid
reservoir cap before removing it.

A CAUTION:
With the wrong kindof fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or they
You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap. may not even workat all. This could cause a
Just look at the window on the brake fluid reservoir. The crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
fluid level should be above MIN. If it isn’t, have your
brake system checked to see if there is a leak.

6-34
 Brake Wear
NOTICE: If you have a C 3500 HD model, it has four-wheel
disc brakes.
0 Using the wrong fluid can badly damage
brake system parts. For example, just a few Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that
make a high-pitched warning sound when the brake
drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine
pads are worn and new pads are needed. The sound
oil, in your brake system can damage brake may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle
system partsso badly thatthey’ll have to be is moving (except when you are pushing on the brake
replaced. Don’t let someone put in the pedal firmly).
wrong kind of fluid.
If you spill brake fluid on yourvehicle’s
0
painted surfaces, the paint finish can be
damaged. Be careful not to spill brake
I A CAUTION:
fluid on yourvehicle. If you do, wash it The brake wear warning sound means that
off immediately. See “Appearance Care” in sooner or later your brakeswon’t work well.
the Index. That could leadto an accident. When you hear
the brake wear warning sound, have your
vehicle serviced.

6-35
 Brake Pedal Travel
I NOTICE: See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal
Continuing to drivewith worn-out brake pads travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
could result in costly brake repair. Brake Adjustment
Every time you make a brake stop, your disc brakes
Some driving conditions or climatesmay cause a brake adjust for wear.
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly If your brake pedal goes down farther than normal, your
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with rear drum brakes may need adjustment. Adjust them by
your brakes. backing up and firmly applying the brakes a few times.
Free movement of brake calipers and properly torqued Replacing Brake System Parts
wheel nuts are necessary to help prevent brake
pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect brake calipers The braking system on a modern vehicle is complex. Its
many parts have to be of top quality and work well
for movement, brake pads for wear, and evenly torque
together if the vehicle is to have really good braking.
wheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM specifications.
Vehicles we design and test have top-quality GM brake
If you have rear drum brakes, they don’t have wear parts in them, as your vehicle does when it is new. When
indicators, but if you ever hear a rear brake rubbing you replace parts of your braking system -- for example,
noise, have the rear brake linings inspected. Also, the when your brake linings wear down and you have to
rear brake drums should be removed and inspected each have new ones put in -- be sure you get new genuine
time the tires are removed for rotation or changing. GM replacement parts. If you don’t, your brakes may
When you have the front brakes replaced, have the rear no longer work properly. For example, if someone
brakes inspected, too. puts in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle,
the balance between your front and rear brakes can
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete change -- for the worse. The braking performance
axle sets. you’ve come to expect can change in many other ways
if someone puts in the wrong replacement brake parts.
6-36
Battery Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle
for longer storage periods.
Every new vehicle has a Delco Freedom@ battery. Yo11
never have to add water to one of these. When it’s time Also, for your audio system, see “Theft-Deterrent
for a new battery, we recommend a Delco Freedom Feature” in the Index.
battery. Get one that has the replacement number shown
on the original battery’s label.
Bulb Replacement
Before you replace any bulbs, be sure that all the lamps
Vehicle Storage are off and the engine isn’t running. See “Replacement
If you’re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days Bulbs” in the Index for the proper types of bulbs to use.
or more, take off the black, negative (-) cable from
the battery. This will help keep your battery from Halogen Bulbs
running down.
I _ -
p\ CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas can burstif you drop or scratch the bulb.You or
that canexplode. You can be badly hurt if you others could be injured.Be sure to read and
aren’t careful. See “Jump Starting”in the Index follow the instructions on the bulb package.
for tips on working around a battery without
getting hurt.

6-37
Headlamps 3. Unplug and remove
the headlamp.
Sealed Beam Lamps
1. Remove the four screws
from the headlamp
retainer.

: ..

4. Plug in the new headlamp and put it in place.

5. Install the retainer to the headlamp and tighten
the screws.
2. Pull the headlamp out and remove the retainer.
Composite Headlamps
1. Remove the two
screws at the top of
the radiator support.

5. Put the new bulb in the lens assembly and turn it to

the right until it is tight.
2. Pull the headlamp lens assembly out.
6. Plug in the electrical connector.
3. Unplug the electrical connector.
7. Put the headlamp lens assembly back into the
vehicle. Install and tighten the two screws.

6-39
Front "urn Signal Lamps 4. Pull the socket out of the
(Sealed Beam Headlamps) lamp assembly.

1. Remove the two screws

at the inside edge of
the parkingkurn signal
lamp assembly.

5. Push in gently on the bulb, turn it counterclockwise

and remove it from the socket.
6. Put the new bulb in the socket, gently press in on the
2. Remove the lamp assembly by swinging it out from bulb and turn it to the right until it is tight.
the inside edge and sliding it out at the outside edge.
7. Put the socket back into the lamp assembly and turn
3. Squeeze the tab on the side of the lamp socket while it to the right until it locks.
turning the socket counterclockwise.
8. Put the parkinghurn signal lamp assembly back into
the vehicle and tighten the screws.

6-40
Front Turn Signal Lamps
(Composite Headlamps)

4. Push in gently on the bulb, turn it counterclockwise

and remove it from the socket.
5. Put the new bulb in the socket, gently press in on the
2. Squeeze the tab on the side of the lamp socket while bulb and turn it to the right until it is tight.
turning the socket counterclockwise.
6. Put the socket back into the lamp assembly and turn
it socket to the right until it locks.
7. Put the parkinghurn signal lamp assembly back into
the vehicle and tighten the screws.

6-41
Fender Marker Lamps 2. Turn the bulb socket
(Dual Rear Wheel Pickup Models) counterclockwise
and remove it from the
1. Remove the screws lens assembly.
and take the fender
marker assembly out
of the fender.

3. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.

4. Put a new bulb into the socket and push it in until
it is tight.
5 . Put the socket back into the lens assembly and turn it
clockwise to tighten it.
6. Replace the lens and tighten the screws.

6-42
Sidemarker Lamps 3. Pull the bulb straight out
of the socket.
1. Remove the screws and
pull out the parkinghurn
signal lamp assembly.

4. Put a new bulb into the socket and push it in until

it is tight.
2. Reach through the opening and turn the sidemarker
bulb socket counterclockwise and remove it. 5. Put the socket back into the sidemarker assembly
and turn it clockwise to tighten it.
6. Replace the parkinghurn signal lamp assembly and
tighten the screws.

6-43
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) 3. Put a new bulb into the
socket and push it in
until it is tight.

4. Replace the lens and tighten the screws.

2. Pull the old bulb straight out of the socket.

6-44
Roof Marker Lamps Taillamps (Pickup Models)
1 . Remove the screws and lift off the lens. 1. Open the tailgate.
2. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket. 2. Remove the two
3. Put a new bulb into the socket and push it in until rear lamp assembly
it is tight. screws near the tailgate
latch and pull out the
4. Replace the lens and tighten the screws. lamp assembly.
Tailgate Marker Lamps
1. Use a screwdriver to gently pry the lensbulb
assembly from the lens holder.
2. Unplug the lens/bulb assembly at the connector wire.
3. Plug in a new lenshulb assembly and push the
connector wire into the hole in the tailgate.
3. Remove the screws
4. Snap the lendbulb assembly into the lens holder. from the bulb retainer
and take it off the
lamp assembly.

6-45
 i

4. Pull the old bulb straight Taillamps (Chassis Cab Models)

out of the socket.
1. Using youk hands, peel the rubber seal awaJ from
I

the lens.
2. Lift the lens off t he
lamp assembly.

5. Put in a new bulb and'push it inuntil it istight.

6. Replace the bulb retainer.
7. Replace the rear lamp assembly and tighten
the screws. 3. Slide the socket out of the lamp assembly.
8. ClQsethe tailgate.
\
 Windshield Wiper Blade Renlacement
For proper type and length, see “Normal Nlalntenance
Replacement Parts” in the Index. To replace the
the socket. windshield wiper blade assembly:

5. Put in a new bulb and, pushing in gently, turn it

clockwise until it is tight.
6. Put the socket back in the lamp assembly and replace
the lens and lens seal.

I . Lift the wiper arm and rotate the blade until it is

facing away from the windshield.
2. Push the release lever and slide the wiper assembly
toward the driver’s sideof the vehicle.
3. Install a new blade by reversing Steps 1 and 2 .

6-47
I Tires
We don’t make tires. Your new vehicle comes with
High-quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer. I
A CAUTIOL.
If you ever have questions about your tire warranty and Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
where to obtain service, see your GM Warranty booklet’ are dangerous.
for details. Overloading your tires can cause overheating
as a result of too much friction.You could
have an airoutand a serious accident. See
“Loading Your Vehicle” in the Index.
Underinflated tires pose the same danger as
overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold.
Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
--
impact such as when youhit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If your
tread is badly worn, or if your tires have
been damaged, replace them.
Inflation -- Tire Pressure
NOTICE:
(continued) ~

The CertificatiodTire label, which is on the rear edge of

the driver’s door, or on the incomplete vehicle document Too much flexing
in the cab, shows the correct inflation pressures for your Too much heat
tires when they’re cold. “Cold” means your vehicle has
0 Tireoverloading
been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more
than 1 mile (1.6 km). Badwear
Bad handling
You can operate some vehicles at reduced inflation Bad fuel economy.
pressures only when you’ll be carrying reduced loads.
On those vehicles, the minimum cold inflation pressures If your tires have too much air (overinflation),
for a typical reduced load are printed on the Improved you can get thefollowing:
Ride Tire Pressure label located on the driver’s door. Unusualwear
Weigh the vehicle to find the load on each tire and see Badhandling
the label for the minimum cold inflation pressures for Roughride
that load. Needless damage from road hazards.

I NOTICE: When to Check

Check your tires once a month or more. Also, check the
Don’t let anyone tellyou that underinflation or tire pressure of the spare tire.
overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tires
don’t have enough air (underinflation), you can
get thefollowing:
NOTICE: (Continued)

6-49
How to Check
FRT
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
II
properly inflated even when they’re underinflated.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be inspected every 6,000 to 8,000 miles
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
(10 000 to 13 000 km) for any signs of unusual wear. If
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first
unusual wear is present, rotate your tires as soon as
rotation is the most important. See “Scheduled
possible and check wheel alignment. Also check for
Maintenance Services” in the Index for scheduled
damaged tires or wheels. See “When It’s Time for New
rotation intervals.
Tires” and “Wheel Replacement’’ later in this section for
more information. If your vehicle has dual rear wheels, If your vehicle has single rear wheels, always use one of
also see “Dual Tire Operation” later in this section. the correct rotation patterns shown here when rotating
your tires.
If your vehicle has front tires with different load ranges
or tread designs (such as all season vs. on/off road) than
the rear tires, don’t rotate your tires front to rear.

6-50
 If your vehicle has dual rear
n wheels and the load range
or tread design for your
front tires is different from
your rear tires,always use
the correct rotation pattern
shown here when rotating
your tires.

If your vehicle has dual rear wheels and the load range
and tread design for your front tires is the same as your The dual tires are rotated as a pair, and the inside rear
rear tires, always use one of the correct rotation patterns tires become the outside reartires.
shown here when rotating your tires.
When you install dual wheels, be sure thevent holes in
the inner and outer wheels on each side arelined up.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and rear
inflation pressures as shown on the CertificatiordTire
label. Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” in the Index.

6-51
 When It’s Time for New Tires

One way to tell when it’s

time for new tires is to
Rust or dirton a wheel, or on me parts to which check the treadwear
it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose indicators, which will
after a time. The wheel could comeoff and cause appear when your tires have
an accident. When you change a wheel, remove only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or
any rust or dirt from places where the wheel less of tread remaining.
attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency,you can Some commercial truck
tires may not have
use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be
treadwear indicators.
sure touse a scraperor wire brush later,if you
need to, toget all the rust or dirt
off. (See
“Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index.)
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
0 You can see cord or fabric showing through the tire’s
rubber.
The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged deep
enough to show cord or fabric.
The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
0 The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
can‘t be repaired well because of the size or location
of the damage.
6-52
Dual Tire Operation Buying New Tires
When the vehicle is new, or whenever a wheel, wheel To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look at
bolt or wheel nut is replaced, check the wheel nut torque the Certificationflire label.
after 100, 1,000 and 6,000 miles (160, 1 600 and 10 000 The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had
km) of driving. For proper torque, see “Wheel Nut a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
Torque” in the Index. number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,
The outer tire on a dual wheel setup generallywears get ones with that same TPC Spec number. That way
faster than the inner tire. Your tires will wear more your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed
evenly and last longer if you rotate the tires periodically. to give proper endurance, handling, speed rating,
If you’re going to be doing a lot of driving on traction, ride and other things during normal service on
high-crown roads, you can reduce tire wear by adding your vehicle. If your tires have an all-season tread
5 psi (35 kPa) to the tire pressure in the outer tires. Be design, the TPC number will be followed by an ”MS”
sure to return to the recommended pressures when no (for mud and snow).
longer drivingunder those conditions. See“Changing a
If you ever replace your tires with those not having a
Flat Tire” in the Index for more information.
TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size,
load range, speed rating and construction type (bias,
bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.

If you operate your vehicle with a tire that is

badly underinflated, the tire can overheat.An
overheated tire can lose air suddenly or catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Be sure all tires
(including the spare,if any) are properly inflated.

6-53
I A CAUTION: I While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to Federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
,

Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
driving. If you mix tiresof different sizes or types
(radial and bias-beltedtires), the vehicle may not Treadwear
handle properly, and you could have a crash, The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
Using tiresof different sizes may also cause the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the same conditions on a specified government test course. For
size and type tireson all wheels. example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half
(1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends
Uniform Tire Quality Grading upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due to variations
The following intormation relates to the system in driving habits, service practices and differences in
developed by the United States National Highway road characteristics and climate.
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance. Traction -- A, B, C
(This appliesonly to vehicles sold in the United States.) The traction grades, from highestto lowest, are A, B, and
The grades are molded on the sidewallsof most C, and they represent the tire’s ability to stopon wet
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading pavement as measured under controlled conditions on
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
tires, space-saver ortemporary use spare tires, tires with A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
nominal rim diameters of I O to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),
or to some limited-production tires. Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
on braking (straightahead) traction tests and does not
include cornering (turning) traction.
6-54
Temperature -- A, B, C Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades areA (the highest), B, and C, The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life
heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under and best overall performance.
controlled conditionson a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the In most cases, you will not need to have your wheels
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and aligned again. However, if you notice unusual tire wear
excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. or your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the
The grade C corresponds to alevel of performance alignment may need to be reset. If you notice your
which all passenger car tires must meet under the vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades wheels may need to be rebalanced.
B and A represent higher levels of performance on the Wheel Replacement
laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, orbadly rusted
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel,
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum
excessive loading, either separately or in combination, wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. GM dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.

6-55
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted the NOTICE:
same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts The wrongwheel can also cause problemswith
or wheel nuts, replace then1 only with new GM original bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper
right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle. height, vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire
chain clearance to thebody and chassis.
I
Whenever a wheel, wheel bolt or wheel nut is replaced
on a dual wheel setup, check the wheel nut torque after
Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts 100, 1,000 and 6,000 miles ( 160, 1 600 and 10 000 km)
or wheel nuts on yourvehicle can be dangerous. of driving. For proper torque, see “Wheel Nut Torque”
It could affect the braking and handling of your in the Index.
vehicle, make your tireslose air and makeyou
See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index for
lose control. You could have a collision in which more information.
you or others couldbe injured. Always use the
correct wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for
replacement.

6-56
Used Replacement Wheels Tire Chains

NOTICE:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is dangerous. If your vehicle has dualwheels or P265/75R16
You can’t know how it’s been used or how many size tires, don’t use tire chains. They can damage
miles it’s been driven.It could fail suddenly and your vehicle.
cause an accident. If you have to replace a wheel, If you don’t have dual wheels or if you have a tire
use a new GM original equipment wheel. size other thanP265/75R16, use tire chains only
where legal and only when youmust. Use chains
that arethe propersize for your tires. Install
them on the tires of the rear axle.
Don’t use chains on the tires of the frontaxle.
Tighten them as tightly as possible with theends
securely fastened. Drive slowlyand follow the chain
manufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear the
chains contacting yourvehicle, stop and retighten
them. If the contact continues,slow down until it
stops. Driving toofast or spinning thewheels with
chains on will damage your vehicle.

6-57
Appearance Care Don’t use any of these unless this manual says you can.
In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:
Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some
are toxic. Others can burst into flame if you strike a 0 Alcohol
match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are Laundry Soap
dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space. 0 Bleach
When you use anything from a container to clean your
vehicle, be sure tofollow the manufacturer’s warnings Reducing Agents
and instructions. And always open your doors or
windows when you’re cleaning the inside. Cleaning the Insideof Your Vehicle
Never use these to clean your vehicle: Use a vacuum cleaner often to getrid of dust and loose
dirt. Wipe vinyl or leather with a clean, damp cloth.
Gasoline
Your GM dealer has two GM cleaners, a solvent-type
Benzene spot lifter and a foam-type powdered cleaner. They will
0 Naphtha clean normal spots and stains very well. Do not use
them on vinyl or leather.
Carbon Tetrachloride
Here are some cleaning tips:
Acetone
Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
0 Paint Thinner
Clean up stains as soon as you can -- before they set.
Turpentine
0 Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change toa clean area
Lacquer Thinner often. A soft brush may be used if stains are stubborn.
Nail Polish Remover 0 Use solvent-type cleaners in a well-ventilated area
only. If you use them, don’t saturate the stained area.
They can all be hazardous -- some more than
others -- and they can all damage your vehicle, too. If a ring forms after spot cleaning, clean the entire
area immediately or it will set.
 ..

Using Foam-Type Cleaneron Fabric Using Solvent-Type Cleaneron Fabric

First, see if you have to use solvent-type cleaner at all.
1
1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose
! dirt. Some spotsand stains will clean off better with just
water and mild soap.
2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section. Mask
surrounding trim along stitch orwelt lines. If you need to use a solvent:
3. Mix Multi-Purpose Powdered Cleaner following 0 Gently scrape excess soil from thetrim material with
the directions on the container label. a clean, dullknife or scraper. Use very little cleaner,
light pressureand clean cloths(preferably
4. Use suds only and apply with a clean sponge.
cheesecloth). Cleaning should start at the outsideof
5. Don’t saturate the material. the stain, “feathering”toward the center. Keep
6. Don’t rub it roughly. changing to a cleansection of the cloth.
7. As soon as you’ve cleaned the section, use a sponge 0 When you clean a stainfrom fabric, imediately
to remove the suds. dry the area with a blow dryer to help prevent a
cleaning ring.
8. Rinse the section with a clean, wet sponge.
9. Wipe off what’s left with a slightly damp paper
Fabric Protection
towel or cloth. Your vehicle has upholstery and carpet thathas been
10. Then dry it immediately with a blow dryer. treated with Scotchgard” Fabric Protector, a 3M
product. It protects fabricsby repelling oil and water,
11. Wipe with a clean cloth. which are the carriersof most stains. Even with this
protection, you still need to cleanyour upholstery and
carpet often to keep it looking new.
I ,

Further information on cleaning is available by calling

1-800-433-3296 (in Minnesota, 1-800-642-6167).
Special Cleaning Problems 3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine, treat
the area with a waterhaking soda solution:
Greasy or Oily Stains 1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml)
Stains caused by grease, oil, butter, margarine, shoe of lukewarm water.
polish, coffee with cream, chewing gum, cosmetic 4. If needed, clean lightly with solvent-type cleaner.
creams, vegetable oils, wax crayon, tar and asphalt can
be removed as follows: Combination Stains
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain. Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili
sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows:
2. Follow the solvent-type instructions described earlier.
Carefully scrape off excess stain, then clean with
3. Shoe polish, wax crayon, tar and asphalt will stain if cool water and allow to dry.
left on a vehicle’s seat fabric. They shouldbe removed
as soon as possible. Be careful, because the cleaner 0 If a stain remains, clean it with solvent-type cleaner.
will dissolve them andmay cause them to spread.
Cleaning Vinyl
Non-Greasy Stains Use warm water and a clean cloth.
Stains caused by catsup, coffee (black), egg,fruit, fruit Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. You
juice, milk, soft drinks, wine, vomit, urine and blood can may have to do it more than once.
be removed as follows:
Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain if
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the you don’t get them off quickly. Use a clean clothand
soiled area with cool water. a GM VinyVLeather Cleaner or equivalent product.
2. If a stain remains, follow the foam-type instructions
described earlier.

6-60
Cleaning Leather Care of Safety Belts
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or Keep belts cleanand dry.
saddle soap. -
0 For stubborn stains, use a GM VinylLeather Cleaner
or equivalent product. A CAU I ION:
Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
cleaners, furniturepolish or shoe polish on leather. Do not bleachor dye safety belts. If you do, it
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
0 Soiled leather should be cleaned immediately. If
might not beable to provide adequate protection.
dirt is allowed to work into the finish, it can harm
the leather. Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and
lukewarm water.
Cleaning theTop of the Instrument Panel
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces Glass
of the instrument panel. Sprays containingsilicones or
waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner(GM
and even make it difficult to see throughthe windshield Part No. 1050427) or a liquid household glass cleaner
under certain conditions. will remove normal tobacco smoke and dust films.
Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass, because they may
cause scratches. Avoid placing decals on the inside rear
window, since they may have to be scraped off later. If
abrasive cleaners areused on the inside of the rear
window, an electric defoggerelement may be damaged.
Any temporary license should not be attached across the
defogger grid.

6-61
Cleaning the Outsideof the Cleaning the Outsideof Your Vehicle
Windshield and Wiper Blades The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield of color, gloss retention and durability.
washer, or if the wiper blade chatterswhen running, wax
or othermaterial may be on the blade or windshield.
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finishis to keep
Clean the outside of the windshield with GM Windshield it clean by washing it often withlukewarm or cold water.
Cleaner, Bon-Ami Powder@(GM Part No. 1050011).
The windshield is clean if beads do not form when you Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
rinse it with water. Don’t use strong soaps or chemical detergents. Use
liquid hand, dish or car washing (mild detergent) soaps.
Clean the blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth Don’t use cleaning agents that are petroleum based, or
soaked in full-strength windshield washer solvent. Then that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents
rinse the blade with water. should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on
Wiper blades should be checked on a regular basis and the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a
replaced when worn. soft, clean chamois or a 100% cotton towel to avoid
surface scratches and water spotting.
Weatherstrips High pressure vehicle washes may cause water to enter
Silicone greaseon weatherstrips will make them last your vehicle.
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.Apply
silicone grease with a clean clothat least every six
months. During very cold, damp weather more frequent
application may be required. (See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants’’ inthe Index.)

6-62
Finish Care Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by droppings, chemicalsfrom industrial chimneys, etc.,can
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If
from your dealer. (See “Appearance Careand Materials” necessary, use non-abrasive cleanersthat are marked
in the Index.) safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Your GM manufactured vehicle may have a Exterior painted surfaces aresubject to aging, weather
“basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish. The clearcoatgives and chemical falloutthat can take their toll over a period
more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat. Always of years. You can help to keep the paint finish looking
use waxes and polishes that are non-abrasive and made new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
for a basecoatklearcoatpaint finish. whenever possible.

NOTICE: Protecting Exterior BrightMetal Parts

Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
a basecoatklearcoat paint finish may dull the needed. However, you may use GM Chrome Polish on
finish or leave swirlmarks. chrome or stainlesssteel trim, if necessary.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid
damaging protective trim, never use auto or chrome
polish, steam or caustic soap toclean aluminum. A
coating of wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended
for all bright metal parts.

6-63
AluminumorChrome Wh ;
(If So Equipped) NOTICE:
Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with When applyinga tire dressingalways take care to
mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After wipe off any overspray or splash from all painted
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft cleantowel. A wax or wheels of the vehicle.
surfaces on the body
may then be applied.
Petroleum-based productsmay damage the paint
The surfaceof these wheels is similar tothe painted finish.
surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners or
abrasive cleaning brushes on them because you could Sheet Metal Damage
damage the surface. You may use chrome polish on If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
chrome wheels, but avoid anypainted surface of the repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
wheel, and buff off immediately after application. applies anti-corrosion material to the parts repaired or
Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic replaced to restore corrosion protection.
vehicle wash that has silicon carbide tire cleaning
brushes. These brushes can also damage the surface Finish Damage
of these wheels. Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish
should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode
Tires quickly and may develop into amajor repair expense.
To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with a tire cleaner. Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your dealer or otherservice
outlets. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected
in your dealer’s body and paint shop.

6-64
Underbody Maintenance Chemical Paint Spotting
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust Some weather and atmospheric conditions can createa
control can collect on the underbody. If these are chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
not removed, accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage can
on the underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, take two forms: blotchy, ringlet-shaped discolorations, and
floor pan and exhaust system even though they have small irregular dark spots etched intothe paint surface.
corrosion protection. Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM
At least every spring, flush thesematerials from the will repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud new vehicles damaged by this fallout conditionwithin
and other debriscan collect. Dirt packed in closed areas 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
of the frame should be loosened before being flushed. whichever occurs first.
Your dealer or an underbody vehicle washing system
This appliesonly to materials manufactured and sold by
can do this for you.
General Motors. Bodies, body conversions orequipment
not made or sold by General Motors are not covered.

6-65
Appearance Care Materials Chart

**Not recommended for use on instrument panel vinyl.

6-66
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) Service Parts Identification Label
You’ll find this labelon the inside of the glove box.
It’s very helpful if you ever need to order parts.On
this label is:
your VIN,

E N G I N E A G
MODEL
CODE YEAR
\ PLANT
ASSEMBLY
0 the model designation,
0 paint information, and
a list of all production options and
This is the legal identifier foryour vehicle. It appears on special equipment.
a plate in the front cornerof the instrument panel, on the
driver’s side.You can see it if you look through the Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
windshield from outside your vehicle. TheVIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificatesof title and registration.

Engine Identification
The eighth character in your VIN is the engine code.
This code will help you identify your engine,
specifications and replacement parts.

6-67
Electrical System Headlamps
The headlamp wiring is protected by an internal circuit
Add-on Electrical Equipment breaker. An electrical overload will cause the lamps to
go on and off, or in some cases to remain off. If this
NOTICE: happens, have your headlamp wiring checked right away.

Windshield Wipers
Don’t add anything electricalto your vehicle unless
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
you check with your dealer first. Some electrical
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
equipment can damage your vehicle and the snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools. If
damage wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. the overload is caused by some electrical problem and
Some add-on electrical equipment can keep other not snow, etc., be sure to get it fixed.
components from workingas they should.
Power Windows and Other Power Options
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see “Servicing power accessories. When the current load is too heavy,
Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index. the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the
circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away.

6-68
Fuses and Circuit Breakers Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protectedfrom The fuse block access door
short circuitsby a combination of fuses, circuitbreakers is on the driver’s side edge
and fusible thermallinks. This greatly reduces the of the instrument panel. Pull
chance of fires caused by electrical problems. off the cover toaccess the
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the fuse block.
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace abad fuse with a new one of the identical size
and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have a
spare fuse,you can borrow one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle that
you can get along without -- like the radio or cigarette
lighter -- and use its fuse, if it is the corre.ct amperage. You can remove fuses with a fuse extractor. The fuse
Replace it as soon as you can. extractor is mounted to the fuse block access door. To
remove fuses if you don’t have a fuse extractor,hold the
end of the fuse between your thumb and index finger
and pull straight out.

6-69
 Fuse Usage
4 Instrument Cluster, DRL Relay, Lamp
J Switch, Keyless Entry, Low Coolant
Module, Illuminated Entry Module, DRAC
E
l o7
0
1 0 3 0 4 0 5
(Diesel Engine)
Not Used
Cruise Control
D 014
Auxiliary Power Outlet
020
OZ2 023 024 I Air Bag System
License Lamp, Parking Lamps, Taillamps,
Roof Marker Lamps, Tailgate Lamps, Front
Sidemarkers, Fog Lamp Relay, Door Switch
Illumination, Fender Lamps, Headlamp
Switch Illumination
Fuse
Usage 10 Air Bag System
1 Stop/TCC Switch, Buzzer, CHMSL, Hazard 11 Wiper Motor, Washer Pump
Lamps, Stoplamm 12 A/C, N C Blower, High Blower Relay
2 Transfer Case 13 Power Amp, Cigarette Lighter, Door Lock
3 Courtesy Lamps, Cargo Lamp, Glove Box Relay, Power Lumbar Seat
Lamp, Dome/Reading Lamps, Vanity Mirrors, 14 4WD Indicator, Cluster, Comfort Controls,
Power Mirrors Instrument Switches, Radio Illumination,
Chime Module
6-70
Fuse
Usage Underhood Fuse/Relay Center
15 DRL Relay, Fog Lamp Relay
16 Front and Rear Turn Signals, Back-up
Lamps, BTSI Solenoid
17 Radio (Ignition)
18 4WAL/VCM, ABS, CruiseControl
19 Radio (Battery)
20 PRNDL, Automatic Transmission,
Speedometer, Check Gages Warning Light
21 Not Used
22 Not Used
23 Not Used
Front Axle, 4WD Indicator Lamp, TP2 Relay The underhood fusehelay center is located in the rear of
24
the engine compartment near the brake fluid reservoir.
(Gasoline Engine)
Move the retainer clips forthe cover to accessthe fuse
A Power Door Lock, Six-Way Power Seat, block.
Keyless Entry Module
You can remove fuses with a fuse extractor. The fuse
B Power Windows extractor is mounted to the interior fuse block. To
remove fuses if you don’t have a fuseextractor, hold the
end of the fuse between your thumb and index finger
and pull straight out.

6-71
 Fuse Usage
GLOW Glow plugs (Diesel Engine)
PLUG
HORN Horn, Underhood Lamps
AUX FAN Auxiliary Fan
ECM- 1 Injectors, PCM/VCM
A/C Air Conditioning
ENG- 1 Ignition Switch, EGR, Canister Purge,
EVRV Idle Coast Solenoid, Heated 0 2 ,
Fuel Heater (Diesel Engine), Water
Sensor (Diesel Engine)
LIGHTING Headlamp and Panel Dimmer Switch,
Fog and Courtesy Fuses
Fuse Usage BATT Battery, Fuse Block Busbar

ECM-B Fuel Pump, PCM/VCM IGN-A Ignition Switch

RR DEFOG Rear Window Defogger IGN-B Ignition Switch

IGN-E Auxiliary Fan Relay Coil, A/C ABS Anti-Lock Brake.Module

Compressor Relay, Hot Fuel Module, BLOWER Hi Blower Relay
Dual Tanks
STOP/HAZ Stoplamps
FUEL SOL Fuel Solenoid (Diesel Engine)

6-72
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamps Quantity Number
Sealed Beam Headlamps 2 H6054
Composite Beam Headlamps 2 6052
Front Marker Lamp 2 194
Front Parking and Turn Lamp 4 2357NA
Rear Parking Lamp 2 3057
Rear Stop and Turn Lamp 2 3057
Back-up Lamp 2 3156
Fender Marker Lamp 4 194
Roof Marker Lamp 5 194
License Plate Lamp 2 194
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp 4 92 1
Underhood Reel Lamp 1 232

6-73
Interior Lamps Quantity Number
Dome Lamps 2 21 1-2
Reading Lamps 2 211-2
uoor Courtesy Lamps 2 194
Four-Wheel-Drive Indicator 1 194
Four-Wheel-Drive Shift Lever 1 194
Instrument Panel Compartment Lamp 1 194
Ashtray Lamp 1 194
Sunshade Vanity Mirror 1 74

Capacities and Specifications

Engine TYPe RPO Code VIN Code Spark Plug Gap
“VORTEC” 4300 V6 L35 W 0.060 inches (1.52 mm)
“VORTEC” 5000 V8 L30 M 0.060 inches (1.52 mm)
“VORTEC” 5700 V8 L3 1 R 0.060 inches (1.52 mm)
“VORTEC” 7400 V8 L29 J 0.060 inches (1.52 mm)

6-74
Wheels and Tires
Model Torque
C 1500, K 1500, C/K 2500, C/K 3500 (Single Rear Wheels) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 lb-ft (190 N.m)
C3500 (Dual Rear Wheels) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 lb-ft (190 N-m)
C-3500HD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175lb-ft(240N.m)
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . See the CertificatiodTire label on the rear edge of the driver's door
or the incomplete vehicle document in the cab.
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement part numbers listed in this section are based on the latest information available at the time of printing,
and are subject to change. If a part listed in this manual is not the same as the part used in your vehicle when it was
built, or if you have any questions, please contact your GM truck dealer.
These specifications are forinformation only. If you have any questions, seethe service manual for the chassis or
refer to the body manufacturer's publications.
VIN Code w M R J
Oil Filter PF52 PF1218T PF12183' PF1218
Air Cleaner Filter A 1300C A 1300C A 1300C A 1300C
PCV Vr-llve CV746C CV796C CV796C cv774c
Spark Plugs 4 1-932 4 1-932 4 1-932 4 1-932
Fuel Filter GF626 GF626 GF626 GF626
Wiper Blades 22 154886 22 154886 22 154886 22 154886
Type Trico Trico Trico Trico
Length 18 inches (45.0 cm) 18 inches (45.0 cm) 18 inches (45.0 cm) 18 inches (45.0 cm)
?Use a PF52 oil filter if your vehicle has four-wheel drive.
6-75
Cooling System Capacity (Approximate) Fuel Tank Capacity (Approximate)
After refill, the level must be rechecked. See “Cooling Type Quantity
System” in the Index. Short Bed .................... . 2 6 gallons (98 L)
Engine VIN Quantity Long Bed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 gallons (128 L)
“VORTEC” 4300 W 13 quarts (12.3 L) Standard Crew Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 gallons (128 L)
“VORTEC” 5000 M 17.5 quarts (16.6 L) Chassis-Cab Side Tank . . . . . . . . . . 23 gallons (87 L)
“VORTEC” 5700 R 17.5 quarts (16.6 L) Chassis-Cab Rear Tank . . . . . . . . . . 17 gallons (64 L)
“VORTEC” 7400 J 25 quarts (23.5 L) 3500 HD Models Side Tank . . . . . . . 23 gallons (87 L)
“VORTEC” 7400 3500 HD Models Rear Tank . . . . . . . 18 to 20 gallons
w/3500 HD J 28.5 quarts (27 L) (68 to 76 L)

Crankcase Capacity (Approximate) Air Conditioning Refrigerants

After refill, the level must be rechecked. See “Engine Not all air conditioning refrigerants are the same.
Oil” in the Index. If the air conditioning system in your vehicle needs
refrigerant, be sure the proper refrigerant is used.
Quantity with If you’re not sure, ask your GM dealer.
Engine VIN Filter?
See the refrigerant charge label.under the hood for
“VORTEC” 4300 W 4.5 quarts (4.3 L) information regarding refrigerant capacity.
“VORTEC” 5000 M 5 quarts (4.8 L)
“VORTEC” 5700% R 5 quarts (4.8 L)
“VORTEC” 7400% J 7 quarts (6.5 L)
Oil filter should be changed at every oil change.
* Add one additional quart (.946 L) for
C-3500 HD Models.
6-76
 Section 7 Maintenance Schedule

Introduction
IMPORTANT-
KEEP ENGINE OIL Your Vehicle and the Environment
AT THE PROPER
,EVEL AND CHANGE A5 Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep Y (1 lur
RECOMMENDED vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance procedures
are important.Improper vehicle maintenance can even
This section covers the maintenance required for your affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
vehicle. Your vehicle needs these services to retain its levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level
safety, dependability and emission control performance. of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good
condition, please maintain your vehicle properly.

Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan

supplemelzts your tlew vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owzer Assistance booklet,or your
GM dealer.for details.

7- 1
How This Section is Organized If you are skilled enough to do some work on your
vehicle, you will probably want to get the service
The remainder of this section is divided into five parts: information GM publishes. See “Service and Owner
“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services”shows Publications” in the Index.
what to have done and how often. Someof these “Part B: Owner Checks and Services” tells you
services can be complex, so unless you are technically what should be checked whenever you stop forfuel. It
qualified and have the necessary equipment, you should also explainswhat you can easily do to help keep your
let your dealer’s service department or another qualified vehicle in good condition.
service center do these jobs.
“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections”
explains important inspections that your GM dealer’s
service department or another qualified service center
should perform.
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can “Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”
be dangerous. In trying doto some jobs,you can lists some products GM recommends to help keep your
be seriously injured.Do your own maintenance vehicle properly maintained. These products, or their
equivalents, should be used whether you do the work
work only if you have the required know-how
yourself or have it done.
and the proper tools and equipment for the job.
If you have any doubt, havea qualified “Part E: Maintenance Record”provides a place
technician do the work. for you to record the maintenance performed on your
vehicle. Whenever any maintenance is performed, be
sure to write it down in this part. This will help you
determine when your next maintenance should be done.
In addition, it is a good idea to keep your maintenance
receipts. They may be needed to qualify your vehicle for
warranty repairs.

7-2
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance these. All parts should be replaced and allnecessamy
repairs done before you or anyone else drives the vehicle.
Services
These schedules are forvehicles that:
Using Your Maintenance Schedule 0 carry passengers and cargo within recommended
We at General Motors want to help you keep your limits. You will find these limits on your vehicle’s
vehicle in good working condition. But we don’t know Certificationmire label. See “Loading Your Vehicle”
exactly how you’ll drive it. You may drive very short in the Index.
distances only a few times a week. Or you may drive e are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
long distances all the time in very hot, dusty weather. driving limits.
You may use your vehicle in making deliveries.
0 are driven off-road in the recommended manner. See
Or you may drive it to work, to do errands or in
many other ways. “Off-Road Driving With Your Four-Wheel-Drive
Vehicle’’ in the Index.
Because of all the different ways people use their GM
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may even need 0 use the recommended fuel. See “Fuel” in the Index.
more frequent checks and replacements than you’ll find
in the schedules in this section. So please read this
Selecting the Right Schedule
section and note how you drive. If you have any First you’ll need to decidewhich of the two schedules is
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good right for your vehicle. Here’s how to decide which
condition, see your GM dealer. schedule to follow:
This part tells you the maintenance services you should Gasoline enginevehicles and diesel enginevehicles
have done and when you should schedulethem. If you have different maintenance requirements. If you have a
go to your dealer for your service needs, you’ll know diesel engine, follow a schedule designated fordiesel
that GM-trained and supported service peoplewill engine vehicles only.
perform the work using genuine GM parts. See the Diesel Engine Supplement for diesel engine
The proper fluids and lubricantsto use are listed in maintenance schedules.
Part D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses
7-3
Maintenance Schedule '

Short Trip/City Definition -- Gasoline Engines

--
At 6,000 Miles (10 000 km) Then Every
12,000 Miles (20 000 km): Tire Rotation.
Follow the Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule if any Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Shields and
one of these conditions is true for your vehicle: Underhood Insulation Inspection (GVWR above
Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km). 8,500 lbs. only). Thermostatically Controlled Engine
This is particularly important when outside Cooling Fan Check (or every 12 months, whichever
temperatures are below freezing. occurs first). Front Wheel Bearing Repack (2WD only)
Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent (or at each brake relining, whichever occurs first).
driving in stop-and-go traffic). Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Fuel Filter Replacement.
You operate your vehicle in dusty areas or Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic
off-road frequently. Transmission Service (vehicles over 8600 GVWR or
You frequently tow a trailer. driven under severe conditions only).
If the vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi Every 60,000 Miles(100 000 km): Engine Accessory
or other commercial application. Drive Belt Inspection. Fuel Tank, Cap and Lines
One of the reasonsyou should follow this scheduleif you Inspection. Exhaust Gas Recirculation System
operate your vehicle under any of these conditions is that Inspection. Evaporative Control System Inspection.
these conditions cause engine oilto break down sooneE Every 100,000 Miles (166 000 km): Cooling System
Service (or every60 months, whichever occurs first).
Short Trip/City Intervals -- Gasoline Engines Spark Plug Wire Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement.
Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV)Valve Inspection.
Every 3,000 Miles (5 000 km): Engine Oil and Filter
Change (or 3 months, whichever occurs first). Chassis These intervalsonly surnnzarite maintenance services.
Lubrication (or 3 months, whichever occurs first). Drive Be sure to.follow the complete maintenance scheduleon
Axle Service (or 3 months, whichever occurs first). the following pages.
7-4
Maintenance Schedule
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Fuel Filter
Replacement. Front Wheel Bearing Repack
(2WD only) (or at each brake relining, whichever
Follow this maintenance schedule only if none of the occurs first).
conditions from the Short TripKity Maintenance
Schedule is true. Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic
Transmission Service (vehicles over 8600 GVWR or
Driving a vehicle kvith a fully warmed engine driven under severe conditionsonly).
under lzighway conditions causes engineoil to break
down slowel: Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Engine Accessory
Drive Belt Inspection. Fuel Tank, Cap and Lines
ILong Tripmighway Intervals -- Gasoline Engines I
~ ~~ ~

Inspection. Exhaust Gas Recirculation System

Inspection. Evaporative Control System Inspection.
Every 7,500 Miles (12 500 km): Engine Oil and Filter Every 100,000 Miles (166 000 km): Cooling System
Change (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). Service (or every60 months, whichever occurs first).
Chassis Lubrication (or every 12 months, whichever Spark Plug Wire Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement.
occurs first). Drive Axle Service. Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve Inspection.
--
At 7,500 Miles (12 500 km) Then Every These interrwls only sunmarize maintemrzce services.
15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Tire Rotation. Be sure to follow the cornplete 1nuintenanceichedule
Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Shields and o n the.following pages.
Underhood Insulation Inspection (GVWR above
8,500 lbs. only). Thermostatically Controlled Engine
Cooling Fan Check (or every 12 months, whichever
occurs first).

7-5
 Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline Engines

The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000miles ** Drive axle service:

(166 000 km) should be performed after 100,000 miles 0 Locking Differential -- Drain fluid and refill at first
(1 66 000 km) at the same intervals.
engine oil change. At subsequent oil changes, check
Footnotes fluid level and add fluid as needed. If driving in
dusty areas ortowing a trailer, drain fluid and refill
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the every 15,000miles (25 000 km),
California Air Resources Board has determined that
the failure to perform this maintenance item will not
0 Standard Differential -- Check fluid level and add
nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability fluid as needed at every oil change. If driving in
prior to the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. dusty areas or towing a trailer, drain fluid and refill
We, however, urge that all recommended every 15,000miles (25 000 km).
maintenance services be performed at the indicated 0 More frequent lubrication may be required for
intervals and the maintenance be recorded. heavy-duty or off-road use.
## Lubricate the front suspension, kingpin bushings, 0 3500 HD Models with applications requiring extreme
steering linkage, transmission shift linkage, transfer overloadtrailer towing conditionsand high-speed
case shift linkage, parking brake cable guides,rear (above 45 mph or 70 kmh) conditions for extended
driveline center splines, front axle propshaft splines periods of time must have the drive axle fluid changed
and brake pedal springs. Ball joints and kingpin every 30,000 miles (50 000 km). See “Recommended
bushings should not be lubricated unless their Fluids and Lubricants” inthis section.
temperature is 10°F (-12°C) or higher, or they
could be damaged.

7-6
I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines I
3,000 Miles (5 000 km) 6,000 Miles (10 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components;see footnote # 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote##
(or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add as needed. Check constant velocity joints and
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity axle seals for leaking.**
joints and axle seals for leaking.** 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”
in the Index for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. During tire rotation,
check brake calipers for freedom of movement.
Refer to the appropriateGM service manual for
proper caliper service procedures.
DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED B Y DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED B Y

7-7
I Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines I
9,000 Miles (15 000 knz) 12,000 Miles (20 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. An Ewission Contr-ol Service.
0Lubricate chassiscomponents; see footnote# 0Lubricate chassiscomponents; see footnote#
(or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking. ** joints and axle seals for leaking. **

c
7-8
ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY:

w
DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY:
I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines I
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every 0If your engine has a thermostatical1Y
3 months, whichever occurs first). controlled-cooling fan, inspect all hoses and
An Emission Control Service. ducts for proper hook-up (or every 12
0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote # months, whichever occurs first). Be sure the
(or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). valve works properly. This is CI Noise Emission
Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in
Check readfront axle fluid level and add
the United States.
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking. **
0For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean
and repack the front wheel bearings (or at
each brake relining, whichever occurs first).
0Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs.
Only: Inspect shields and underhood
insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust I
L
DATE I ACTUAL MILEAGE ISERVICED BY1
or replace as required. This is a Noise Emission
Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in
the United States.

7-9
 Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule Gasoline Engines0-

18,000 Miles (30 000 km) 21,000 Miles (35000 km)

0Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote
## 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote#
(or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
0Check readfront axle fluid level andadd fluid
as needed. Check constant velocity joints and 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
axle seals for leaking.** fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation’’ joints and axle seals for leaking. *c:k
in the Index for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. During tire rotation,
check brake calipers for freedomof movement.
Refer to the appropriate GM service manual for
proper caliper service procedures.
DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY:

7-10
I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines I
24,000 Miles (40 000 km) 27,000 Miles (45 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every ' 0Change engineoil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occursfirst). 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. An Etnission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote ## I7 Lubricate chassis components; see footnote#
(or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
0Check readfront axle fluidlevel and add 0Check readfront axle fluid leveland add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.** joints and axle seals for leaking.**

I I I
DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY:
 Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline Engines
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
0Change engineoil and filter (or every 0If your engine h a m thermostatically
3 months, whichever occurs first). controlled cooling fan, inspect,all hoses
An Emission Control Service. and ducts for proper hook-up (or every
0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote# 12 months, whichever occurs first). Be sure
(or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). the valve works properly. This is cz Noise
Emission Control Service. Applicable only to
Check readfront axle fluid level and add
vehicles sold i n the United States.
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking. ** 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and
Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation
0For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean pattern and additional information. During
and repack the front wheel bearings (or at tire rotation, check brake calipers for
each brake relining, whichever occurs first). freedom of movement. Refer to the
0Replace fuel filter.An Emission Control Service. appropriate GM service manual for proper
0Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs. caliper service procedures.
Only: Inspect shields and underhood I DATE I ACTUAL MILEAGE ISERVICED BYI
insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust
or replace as required. This is a Noise Emission
Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in
the United States.
7-12
I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule.-- Gasoline Engines I
33,000 Miles (55 000 km) 36,000 Miles (60 000 km) , I
'i
0Change engine oiland filter (or every 0Change engine oiland filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Sewice.
0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote ## 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote#
(or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constantvelocity fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking. ** joints and axle seals forleaking. * *

I DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: DA'FE. . ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED B Y

7-13
 Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline 5 g i n e s I
39,000 Miles (65 000 km) 42,000 Miles (70 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (orevery 0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components; seefootnote # Lubricate chassis components; see footnote#
(or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. Check constant velocity joints and
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity axle seals for leaking.**
joints and axle seals for leaking. ** 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”
in the Index for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. During tire rotation,
check brake calipers for freedom of movement.
Refer to the appropriate GM service manual for
DroDer caber service Drocedures.
DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED B Y

7-14
m i T r i p / C i t y Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines I
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)
0Change engineoil and filter (or every 0If your engine has a thermostatically
3 months, whichever occurs first). controlled cooling fan,inspect all hoses
An Emission Control Service. and ducts for properhook-up (or every
0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote# 12 months, whichever occurs first).Be sure
(or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst). the valve works properly. This is a Noise
Emission Control Service. Applicableonly to
0Check readfront axle fluid leveland add vehicles sold in the United States.
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.**
0For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean
and repack the front wheel bearings (or at
each brake relining,whichever occurs first).
0Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs.
Only: Inspect shieldsand underhood I I I 3
insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY:
or replace as required.This is a Noise Emission
Control Service. Applicableonly to vehicles sold in
the United States.

7-15
I Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines ~1
48,000 Miles (80 000 km) 50,000 Miles (83 000 km)
0Change engineoil and filter (or every 0Change automatic transmission fluid
3 months, whichever occurs first). and filter if the vehicle’s GVWR is over
An Emission Control Service. 8600 lbs. or if the vehicle is mainly driven
0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote# under one or more of these conditions:
(or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). - In heavy city traffic where the outside
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add temperature regularly reaches 90°F
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity (32°C) or higher.
joints and axle seals for leaking. ** - In hilly or mountainous rerraln.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.

DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED B Y

7-16
I 1
I Short TriplCity Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines I
51,000 Miles (85 000 km)
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or 0Change engine oil and filter (or every
delivery service. 3 months, whichever occurs first).
If you do not use your vehicle under any of An Emission Control Service.
fluid and filter do not
these conditions, the 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote#
pequire’changing. (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
Manual transmission fluid doesn’t require change. 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking. **

DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: DATE . ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY:

7-17
i
--
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule Gasoline Engines -
54,000 Miles (90 000 km) 57,000 Miles (95 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every 17 Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote# 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote#
(or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. Check constant velocity joints and 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
axle seals for leaking.** fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation’’ joints and axle seals for leaking. **
in the Index for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. During tire rotation,
check brake calipers for freedom of movement.
Refer to the appropriate GM service manual for
proper caliper service procedures.
DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY:

7-18
 Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
Change engineoil and filter (or every 0If your engine has a thermostatically
3 months, whichever occurs first). controlled cooling fan, inspectall hoses
An Emission Control Service. and ducts for properhook-up (or every
0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote## 12 months, whichever occurs first). Be sure
(or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). the valve works properly. This is a Noise
Emission Control Service. Applicable only to
0Check readfront axle fluid leveland add vehicles sold in the United States.
fluid as needed. Check constantvelocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.** 0Inspect engineaccessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
0For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only:Clean
and repack the front wheel bearings (or at 0Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service.
each brake relining, whichever occurs first). 0Conduct ExhaustGas Recirculation (EGR)
0Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs. system inspection as described in the
Only: Inspect shieldsand underhood service manual.An Einission Control Service. 3-
insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust (Continued)
or replaceas required. This is a NoiseEmission
Control Service. Applicable only to vehicles sold in
the United States.

7-19
I Short TripKity Maint-nance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines I
0,000 Miles (100 000 km) (Continued) 63,OOO.Miles(105 000 kmj
0Conduct evaporative controlsystem Change engine oil and filter (or every
inspection. Check all fuel and vapor lines 3 months, whichever occurs first).
and hoses for proper hook-up, routing and An Emission Control Service.
condition. Checkthat the purge valve works 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote#
properly (if equipped). Replace asneeded. (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
17 Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
or leaks. Inspect fuel capgasket for any joints and axle seals for leaking.**
damage. Replace parts as needed.
An Emission Control Service. 3-

I DATE I ACTUAL MILEAGE ISEWICED BY:I DATEACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED B Y

7-20
I Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines I
66,000 Miles (110 000 km) 69,000 Miles (115 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every 0Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occursfirst). 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote
# 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote ##
(or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst). (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid Cl Check readfront axle fluid level and add
as needed. Check constant velo.city joints and fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
axle sealsfor leaking. **
joints and axle seals for leaking. * *
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”
in the Index for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. During tire rotation,
check brake calipers for freedomof movement.
Refer to the appropriateGM service manual for
proper caliper service procedures.
DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY:
 Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline Engines
72,000 Miles (120 000 km) 75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
0Change engineoiLand filter (or every 0Change engineoil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. An E1nission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote# 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote#
(or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
0Check readfront axle fluidlevel and add 0For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity and repack the front wheel bearings (or at
joints and axle seals forleaking. ** each brake relining, whichever occurs first).
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.**
0Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs.
Only: Inspect shields and underhood
DATE
ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED B Y insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust
or replace as required. This is a Noise Emission
Control Service. Appliccrble only to velzicles sold in
the United Stcltes.

7-22
 Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline Engines
78,000 Miles (130 000 km)
0If your engine has a thermostatically 0Change engine oil and filter (or every
. controlled cooling fan, inspect all hoses 3 months, whichever occurs first).
and ducts for proper hook-up (or every Au Emission Contt-ol Service.
12 months, whichever occurs first). Be sure 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote##
the valve works properly. This is CI Noise (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
Emission Coitttxd Service. Applicable o111yto 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid
vel?ic:lessold irz the United Stntes. as needed. Check constant velocity joints and
axle seals for leaking. **
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”
in the Index for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. During tire rotation,
check brake calipers for freedomof movement.
Refer to the appropriate GM service manual for
proper caliper service procedures.
I 1 I
DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED B Y

7-23
I Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines1
81,000 Miles (135 000 km) 84,000 Miles (140 000 km)
0Change engineoil and filter (or every El Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. AI? Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote# 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote#
(or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
0Check readfront axle fluidlevel and add 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.** joints and axle seals for leaking. **

DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY:

7-24
 Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines
87,000 Miles (145 000 km) 90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
0Change engineoil and filter (or every Change engine oil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote# Lubricate chassis components; see footnote #
(or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
(or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add as needed. Check constant velocity joints and
fluid as needed. Check constantvelocity axle seals for leaking.**
joints and axle seals for leaking. ** 0For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean
and repack the front wheel bearings (or at
each brake relining, whichever occurs first).
0Replace fuel filter.An Emission ControlService.
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”
in the Index for proper rotation pattern and
I I I i additional information. During tire rotation,
DATE
check brake calipers for freedom of movement.
Refer to the appropriateGM service manual for
proper caliper service procedures.
(Continued)
7-25
I Short Wip/City Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines I
90,000 Miles (150 000 km) (Continued) 93,000 Miles (155 000 km)
0Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 Ibs. 0Change engine oil and filter (or every
Only: Inspect shields and underhood 3 months, whichever occurs first).
insulation for damage or looseness.Adjust AH Elnission Control Service.
or replace as required. This is a Noise E17?issiun 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote#
Control Service. Applicuble on.ly to vehicles sold in (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first
the United States.
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
0If your engine has a thermostatically fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
controlled cooling fan, inspect all hoses joints and axle seals for leaking. **
and ducts for proper hook-up (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first). Be sure
the valve works properly. This is LE Noise
Emission Control Service. Applicable only tu
vehicles sold in the United Stutes.

I DATE I ACTUALMILEAGE ISERVICED B Y DATE SERVICED

ACTUAL MILEAGE BY:

7-26
I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines I
96,000 Miles (160 000 km) 99,000 Miles (165000 km)
0Change engineoil and filter (or every 0Change engineoil and filter (or every
3 months, whichever occurs first). 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. An Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote# 0Lubricate chassis components;see footnote #
(or every 3 months, whichever occurs first). (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
0Check readfront axle fluidlevel and add 0Check readfront axle fluid leveland add
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.** joints and axle seals for leaking.**

1
DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY. DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED B Y

7-27
I Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline Engines I
100,000 Miles (166 000 km)
0Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or - In hilly or mountainous terrain.
every 60 months since last service, whichever - When doing frequent trailer towing.
occurs first). See “Engine Coolant”in the
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or
Index for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean
delivery service.
radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck.
Pressure test cooling system and pressure cap. not use your vehicle under any of
I f y o ~ do
l

An Emission Control Service. ’f these conditions, the*fluid

and filter donot
require changing.
0Inspect spark plug wires.
An Emission Control Service. Manual transmission fluid doesn’t require change

0Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service. 0Inspect Positive Crankcase Ventilation
( P c v ) valve. An Emission Control Service.
0Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter if the vehicle’s GVWR isover
8600 lbs. or if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions: DATE SERVICED
ACTUAL MILEAGE BY:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90 O F
(32 O C) or higher.

7-28
 Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline Engines

The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles ** Drive axle service:
(166 000 km) should be performed after 100,000 miles 0 Locking Differential -- Drain fluid and refill at first
(166 000 km) at the same intervals. engine oil change. At subsequent oil changes, check
Footnotes fluid level and add fluid as needed. If driving in
dusty areas ortowing a trailer, drain fluid and refill
7 The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the every 15,000 miles (25 000 km).
California Air Resources Board has determined that
the failure to perform this maintenance item will not
0 Standard Differential -- Check fluid levet and add
nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability fluid as needed at every engine oil change. If driving
prior to the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. in dusty areas or towing a trailer, drain fluid and
We, however, urge that all recommended refill every 15,000 miles (25 000 km).
maintenance services be performed at the indicated 0 More frequent lubrication may be required for
intervals and the maintenance be recorded. heavy-duty or off-road use.
# Lubricate the front suspension, kingpin bushings, 0 3500 HD Models with applications requiring extreme
steering linkage, transmission shift linkage, transfer overloadtrailer towing conditions and high-speed
case shift linkage,parking brake cable guides, rear (above 45 mph or 70 kmk)conditions for extended
driveline center splines, front axlepropshaft splines periods of time must havethe drive axle fluid changed
and brake pedal springs. Ball joints and kingpin every 30,000 miles (50 OOO km). See “Recommended
bushings should not be lubricated unless their Fluids and Lubricants” in this section.
temperature is 10°F (- 12°C) or higher, or they
could be damaged.

7-29
I LongTrip/Highy ay Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines

7,500 Miles (12 500 km) 15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
0Change engine oiland filter (or every 0Change engine oil and filter (or every
12 months, whichever occursfirst). 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. Ai1 Emission Control Service.
0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote
## 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote#
(or every 12 months, whichever occursfirst). (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
0Check readfront axle fluid leveland add fluid
as needed. Check constant velocity joints and 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
axle seals for leaking.** fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” joints and axle seals for leaking. **
in the Index for proper rotation pattern and 0Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs.
additional information. During tire rotation, Only: Inspect shields and underhood
check brake calipers for freedom of movement. insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust
Refer to the appropriate GM service manual for or replace as required. This is a Noise Ernissiorz
proper caliper service procedures. Control Service. Appliccrble only to vehicles sold in
the United States.

7-30
 Long TripKIighway lwaintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines
22,500 Miles (37 500 km)
0If your engine has a thermostatically 0Change engine oil and filter (or every
controlled cooling fan, inspect all hoses 12 months, whichever occurs first).
and ducts for proper hook-up (or every An Emission Control Service.
12 months, whichever occurs first). Be sure 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote#
the valve works properly. This is (1 Noise (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
Emission Control Service. Applirnhleonly to 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid
vehicles sold in the United States. as needed. Check constant velocity joints and
axle seals for leaking.**
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”
in the Index for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. During tire rotation,
check brake calipers for freedom of movement.
Refer to the appropriateGM service manual for
proper caliper service procedures.

7-31
I Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule-- Gasolim Engines
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
0Change engine oil and filter (or every 0If your engine has a thermostatically
12 months, whichever occurs first). controlled cooling fan,inspect all hoses
An Emission Control Service. and ducts forproper hook-up (or every
0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote # 12 months, whichever occurs first). Be sure
(or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). the valve works properly.This is a Noise
Emission Control Service. Applicable only to
0Check readfront axle fluidlevel and add vehicles sold in the United Stutes.
fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
joints and axle seals for leaking. **
0For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean
and repack the front wheel bearings (or at
each brake relining, whichever occurs first).
0Replace fuel filter.An Emission Control Service.
0Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs.
Only: Inspect shields and underhood DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY:
insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust
or replace as required. This is LZ Noise Emission
Control Service. Applicvlhle only to vehic1t.s sold in
the United Stutks.
7-32
 Long TripMighway Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline Engines
37,500 Miles (62 500 km) 45,000 Miles (75 000 km)
0Change engine oiland filter (or every 0Change engineoil and filter (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first). 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. A n Emission Control Service.
Lubricate chassis components; see footnote # 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote##
(or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
0Check readfront axle fluid leveliandadd fluid 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add
as needed. Check constant velocityjoints and
axle seals for leaking. ** fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” joints and axle seals for leaking. **
in the Index for proper rotation pattern and 0Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs.
additional information. During tire rotation, Only: Inspect shields and underhood
check brake calipers for freedom of movement. insulation for damage or looseness.Adjust
Refer to the appropriate GM service manual for or replaceas required. This is CI Noise Emission
proper caliper service procedures. Control Service. Applicuhle only to vehicles sold i11
the United States.
(Continued)

7-33
I Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline Engines
45,000 Miles (75 000 km) (Continued) 50,000 Miles (83 000 km)
0If your engine has a thermostatically 0Change automatic transmission fluid
controlled cooling fan, inspect all hoses and filter if the vehicle’s GVWR is over
and ducts forproper hook-up (or every 8600 lbs. or if the vehicle is mainly driven
12 months, whichever occurs first). Be sure under one or more of these conditions:
the valve works properly. This is a Noise - In heavy city traffic where the outside
Emission Control Service. Applicable only to temperature regularly reaches 9OoF
vehicles sold in the United States. (32°C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.

I DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED B Y

7-34
Long Tripmighway MaintenanceSchedL,z -- Gasolin, Engines
52,500 Miles (87 500 km)
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or 0Change engine oil and filter (or every
delivery service. 12 months, whichever occurs first).
IfJwu do not use your vehicle under uny of An Emission C o m d Service.
these cwnditiorzs, rhefll.tid and filter d o not 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote#
require clmlzgiq. (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid
Manual transmission fluid doesn’t require change. as needed. Check constant velocity joints and
axle seals for leaking. ‘H
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”
in the Index for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. During tire rotation,
check brake calipers for freedom of movement.
Refer to the appropriate GM service manual for
proper caliper service procedures.

I
ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED B Y DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED B Y
I Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
0Change engineoil and filter (or every 0Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage
12 months, whichever occurs first). or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any
An Emission Control Service. damage. Replace parts as needed.
Lubricate chassis components;see footnote # An Emission Control Service.
(or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). 0Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs.
Check readfront axle fluidlevel and add Only: Inspect shields and underhood
fluid asneeded. Check constantvelocity insulation for damage or looseness.Adjust
joints and axle seals for leaking.** or replace as required. This is a Noise Emissiotz
Control Service. Appliccrble only to vehicles sold in
0For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean the United States.
and repack the front wheel bearings (or at
each brake relining, whichever occurs first). 0If your engine has a thermostatically
0Inspect engine accessory drive belt. controlled cooling fan, inspect all hoses
An Emission Control Service.
and ducts forproper hook-up (orevery
12 months, whichever occurs first). Be sure
Replace fuel filter.An Emission Control Service. -f- the valve works properly.This is a Noise
Emission Control Service. Appliccrble only to
vehicles sold in the United States.

7-36
I Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines 1
67,500 Miles (112 500 km)
c]Conduct Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Change engine oil and filter (or every
system inspection as described in the 12 months, whichever occurs first).
service manual. An Emission Control Service.-t- An Emission Control Service.
0Conduct evaporative control system 0Lubricate chassis com.ponents; see footnote
#
(or every 12 months, whichever occursfirst).
inspection. Check all fuel and vapor lines
and hoses for proper hook-up, routing and
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid
as needed. Check constant velocity joints and
condition. Check that the purge valve works axle seals for leaking.**
properly, if equipped. Replace as needed.
An Emission Control Service. 3- 0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”
in the Index for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. During tire rotation,
check brake calipers for freedom of movement.
Refer to the appropriateGM service manualfor
proper caliper service procedures.
DATE ._ ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY:

- 7-37
[ Long Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule I Gasoline Engines I
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
0Change engineoil and filter (or every 0If your engine has a thermostatically
12 months, whichever occurs first). controlled cooling fan, inspect all hoses
An Emission Control Service. and ducts for proper hook-up (or every
0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote## 12 months, whichever occurs first). Be sure
(or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). the valve works properly.This is CI Noise
Emission Control Service. Applicable only to
0Check readfront axle fluid level and add vehicles sold in the United States.
fluid as needed. Check constantvelocity
joints and axle seals for leaking.**
0Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs.
Only: Inspect shields and underhood
insulation for damage orlooseness. Adjust
or replace as required. This is a Noise Emission
Control Service. Applicable onlyto vehicles sold in
the United States. ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED B Y
DATE

7-38
1 Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline Engines I
82,500 Miles (137 500 km) 90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
Change engine oiland filter (or every 0Change engineoil and filter (or every
12 months, whichever occurs first). 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An EnIission Control Servic-e. An Emission Cotztrol Service.
0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote# 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote#/
(or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
0Check readfront axlefluid level and add fluid
as needed. Check constant velocityjoints and 0Check readfront axle fluidlevel and add
axle seals for leaking. ** fluid as needed. Check constant velocity
0Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation’’ joints and axle seals for leaking. **
in the Index for proper rotation pattern and 0For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean
additional information. During tire rotation, and repack the front wheel bearings (orat
check brake calipers for freedom of movement. each brake relining, whichever occurs first).
Refer to the appropriate GM ’.servicemanual for [7 Replace fuel filter. All Emission Control Service.
proper caliper service procedures.
(Continued)

7-39
 Long Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule-- Gasoline Engines
90,000 Miles (150 000 km) (Continued) 97,500 Miles (142 500 km)
0Vehicles With GVWR Above 8,500 lbs. 0Change engine oil and filter (or every
Only: Inspect shields and underhood 12 months, whichever occurs first).
insulation for damage or looseness. Adjust An Emission Control Service.
or replace as required. This is a Noise Emission 0Lubricate chassis components; see footnote#
Control Service. Applicableonly to vehicles soldin (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
the United States. 0Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid
O’If your engine has a thermostatically as needed. Check constant velocity joints and
axle seals for leaking.**
controlled cooling fan, i.nspect all hoses
and ducts for proper hook-up (or every 0Rotate tires. S e e “Tire Inspection and Rotation” ” I
in the Index for proper rotation pattern and
-12months, whichever occurs first). Be sure additional information. During tire rotation,
the valve works properly. This is a Noise check brake calipers for freedom of movement.
Emission Control Service. Applicableonly to Refer to the appropriateGM service manual for
vehicles sold in the United States. proper caliper service procedures.
DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY: DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY:
I Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule -- Gasoline EnginPC I
100,000 Miles ( I 66 000 km)
0Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or - In hilly or mountainous terrain.
every 60 months since last service, - When doing frequent trailer towing.
whichever occurs first). See “Engine - Uses such as found in taxi, police or
Coolant” in the Index for what to use. delivery service.
Inspect hoses. Cleanradiator, condenser,
pressure cap and neck. Pressure test the I f you do not use your vehicle under m y of
cooling system and pressure cap. these conditions, the fluid and filter donot
An Emission Control Service. -f require chmging.

0Inspect sparkplug wires. Manual transmission fluid doesn’t require change.

An Emission Control Service. 0 Inspect Positive CrankcaseVentilation
Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service. (PCV) valve. An Emission Control Service.
Change automatic transmissionfluid
and filter if the vehicle’s GVWR is over
8600 lbs. or if the vehicle is mainly driven DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY:
under one or more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90”F
(32°C) or higher.
Part B: Owner Checks and Services Engine Coolant Level Check
Listed below are owner checks and services which Check the engine coolant level and add the proper
should be performed at the intervals specified to help coolant mix if necessary. See “Engine Coolant” in the
ensure the safety, dependability and emission control Index for further details.
performance of your vehicle.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
windshield washer tank and add the proper fluid if
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
necessary. See “Windshield Washer Fluid” in the Index
in Part D.
for further details.
At the First 100, 1,000 and 6,000 Miles A Least Once a Month
(160,1600 and 10 000 km)
For vehicles with dual wheels, check dual wheel nut Tire Inflation Check
torque. For proper torque, see “Wheel Nut Torque” in Make sure tires are inflated to the correct pressures.
the Index. See “Tires” in the Index for further details.
At Each Fuel Fill Cassette Deck Service
It is important for you or a service station attendurzf to Clean cassette deck.Cleaning should be done every
perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill. 50 hours of tape play. See “Audio Systems” in the
Index for further details.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper
oil if necessary.
See “Engine Oil” in the Index for further details.

7-42
At Least Twice a Year Automatic Transmission Check
Check the transmission fluid level; add if needed. See
Restraint System Check “Automatic Transmission” in the Index. A fluid loss
Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your may indicate a problem. Check the system and repair
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are if needed.
working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged
safety belt system parts. If you see anything that might Hydraulic ClutchSystem Check
keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have it Check the fluid level in the clutch reservoir. See
repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced. “Hydraulic Clutch Fluid” in the Index. A fluid loss in
Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and this system could indicate aproblem. Have the system
have them repaired or replaced. (The airbag system inspected and repaired at once.
does not need regular maintenance.)
At Least Once aYear
Air Cleaner FilterRestriction Indicator Check
Key Lock Cylinders Service
Your vehicle has an indicator on the engine that lets you
know when the air cleaner filteris dirty and needs to be Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant
changed. Check indicator at least twice a year or when specified in Part D.
your oil is changed. See “Air Cleaner”in the Index for
Body Lubrication Service
more information.
Lubricate all fuel doors, body hood and body door
Manual Transmission Check hinges, tailgate and tailgate handle pivot points, latches,
Check the transmission fluid level; add if needed. See locks and folding seat hardware. Part D tells you what to
“Manual Transmission’’ in the Index. A fluid loss may use. More frequent lubrication may be required when
indicate a problem. Check the system and repair if needed. exposed to a corrosive environment.

7-43
Starter Switch Check Brake-Transmission Shift Interlock(BTSI)
Check (Automatic Transmission)

When you are doing this check, the vehicle could

move suddenly. If does,
it you or others could be
injured. Follow the steps below,
b. CAUTION:
d
When you are doing thischeck, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If it does, youor others could be
injured. Follow the steps below,
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. 1, Before you start, be sure you have enough
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake (see “Parking room around the vehicle. It should be parked on
Brake” in the Index if necessary) and the regular brake. a level surface.
NOTE: Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be 2, Firmly apply the parking brake (see “Parking Brake”
ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts. in the Index if necessary).
3. On automatic transmission vehicles, try to start the NOTE: Be ready to apply the regular brake
engine in each gear. The starter should work only in immediately if the vehicle begins to move.
PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If the starter works in
any other position, your vehicle needs service. 3. With the engine off, turn the key to the RUN .,..”’

position, but don’tstart the engine. Without applying

On manual transmission vehicles, put the shift lever the regular brake, tryto move the shift lever out of
in NEUTRAL (N), push the clutch down halfway PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever moves
and try to start the engine. The starter should work out of PARK (P), your vehicle’s BTSI needs service.
only when the clutch is pushed down all the way to
the floor. If the starter works when the clutch isn’t
pushed all the way down, your vehicle needs service
7-44
Steering Column Lock Check Parking Brake and Automatic Transmission
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn PARK (P) Mechanism Check
the key to LOCK in each shift lever position.
0 With an automatic transmission, the key should turn
to LOCK only when the shift lever is in PARK (P).
With a manual transmission, the key should turn When you are doing this check, your vehicle
to LOCK only when the shift lever is in could begin tomove. You or others could be
REVERSE (R). injured and property could be damaged. Make
On vehicles with a key release button, try to turn the key sure there is room in front of your vehicle in case
to LOCK without pressing the button. The key should it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regular
turn to LOCK only when you press the key button. brake atonce should thevehicle begin to move.
On all vehicles, the key should come out only in LOCK.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set
the parking brake.
To check the parking brake: With the engine running
and transmission in NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove
foot pressure from the regular brake pedal. Do this
until the vehicle is held by the parking brake only.
To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then
release all brakes.

7-45
Part C: Periodic Maintenance Exhaust System Inspection
Inspections Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body
near the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged,
Listed below are inspections and services which should
missing or out-of-position parts as well as open seams,
be performed at least twice a year (for instance, each
holes, loose connections or other conditions which could
spring and fall). You should let your GM dealer’s
cause a heat build-up in the floor pan or could let
service department or other qualified service center do
exhaust fumes into the vehicle. See “Engine Exhaust”
these jobs. Make sure any necessary repairs are
in the Index.
completed at once.
Proper procedures to perform these services may be Radiator and Heater Hose Inspection
found in a GM service manual. See “Service and Owner Inspect the hoses ana nave them replaced if they are
Publications’’ in the Index. cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace as needed.
Steering and Suspension Inspection
Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering Throttle Linkage Inspection
system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of Inspect the throttle linkage for interference or binding,
wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect the power steering and for damage or missing parts. Replace parts as
lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, needed. Replace any cables that have high effort or
cracks, chafing,etc. excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator and cruise
control cables.

7-46
Drive Axle Service Brake System Inspection
Check readfront axle fluid level and add as needed. Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines and
Check constant velocity joints and axle sealsfor leaking. hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,
chafing, etc.Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors
Transfer Case (Four-wheel Drive) for surface condition.For vehicles with rear drum
Inspection brakes, also inspect drum brake linings for wear and
cracks, Inspect other brake parts, including drums,
Every 12 months or at oil change intervals, check front
wheel cylinders, calipers,parking brake, etc. Check
axle and transfer caseand add lubricant when necessary.
parking brake adjustment. You may need to have your
Oil the control lever pivot point and all exposed control
brakes inspected more often if your driving habits or
linkage. Check vent hose at transfer casefor kinks and
conditions result in frequent braking.
proper installation. More frequent lubrication may be
required on off-road use.

7-47
Part D: Recommended Fluids and
~ ~~

USAGE FLUIDLUBRICANT
Lubricants Coolant GM Part No. 3634621 or
NOTE: Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, Supplement equivalent with a complete flush
part number or specification may be obtained from your Sealer and refill.
GM dealer.
Hydraulic Brake Delco Supreme 1 1 Brake Fluid
@

IUSAGE I FLUID/LUBRICANT System (GM Part No. 1052535 or

equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid).
Engine Oil Engine oil with the American
(Gasoline Petroleum Institute Certified For Hydraulic Clutch Hydraulic Clutch Fluid (GM Part
Engine) Gasoline Engines “Starburst” System No. 12345347 or equivalent).
symbol of the proper viscosity. To Parking Brake Chassis lubricant (GM Part
determine the preferred viscosity Cable Guides No. 1052497 or equivalent) or
for your vehicle’s engine, see lubricant meeting requirements
“Engine Oil” in the Index. of NLGI Grade 2, Category LB
Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean water or GC-LB.
(preferably distilled) and GM Power Steering GM Power Steering Fluid
Goodwrench@DEX-COOL or System (GM Part No. 1052884 - 1 pt.,
Havoline@DEX-COOL TM 1050017 - 1 qt., or equivalent).
(orange-colored, silicate-free)
antifreeze conforming to GM
Specification 6277M. See “Engine
Coolant” in the Index.

7-48
USAGE FLUIDLUBRICANT USAGE FLUIDLUBRICANT
Manual GM Goodwrench Synthetic Chassis Chassis lubricant (GM Part
Transmission Manual Transmission Gear Oil Lubrication No. 1052497 or equivalent) or
(5-Speed with (GM Part No. 12346190 - 1 qt.), lubricant meeting requirements of
Low Gear, RPO Castrol Syntorq@LT or equivalent NLGI Grade 2, Category LB or
MW3) SAE 75W-90 GL-4 gear oil. GC-LB.
Manual Synchromesh Transmission Fluid Front Wheel Wheel bearing lubricant meeting
Transmission (GM Part No. 12345349 or Bearings requirements of NLGI Grade 2,
(5-Speed without equivalent). Category GC or GC-LB (GM Part
Low Gear, RPO No. 1051344 or equivalent).
MG5) Differential, Axle Lubricant (GM Part
Automatic DEXRON@-111Automatic Front and Rear No. 1052271) or SAE 80W-90
Transmission Transmission Fluid. Axle GL-5 Gear Lubricant.
Key Lock Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Differential, C3 SAE 75W- 140Synthetic Gear
Cylinders Superlube@ (GM Part (3500 HD) Lubricant.
No. 1234624I or equivalent). Trucks With
~~~~~ ~

Dana Rear Axle

Floor Shift Lubriplate Lubricant aerosol (GM
Linkage Part No. 12346293 or equivalent) Transfer Case DEXRON@-I11Automatic
or lubricant meeting requirements Transmission Fluid.
of NLGI Grade 2 Category LB or
GC-LB.

7-49
USAGE FLUIDLUBRICANT USAGE FLUID/LUBRICANT
Windshield GM Optikleen@Washer Solvent Body Door Multi-pur ose lubricant,
Washer Solvent (GM Part No. 10515 IS) or Hinge Pins, Superlube& (GM Part
equivalent. Tailgate Hinge No. 12346241 or equivalent).
and Linkage,
Propeller Shaft Chassis lubricant (GM Part Folding Seat,
SplineKJniversal No. 1052497 or equivalent) or Fuel Door Hinge
Joint and lubricant meeting requirements of
Propeller Shaft NLGI Grade 2, Category LB or Tailgate Handle Multi-purpose lubricant,
GC-LB. Pivot Points, Superlube@(GM Part
Hinges, Latch No. 12346241 or equivalent).
Hood Latch Lubriplate lubricant aerosol (GM Bolt and Linkage
Assembly, Part No. 12346293 or equivalent)
Pivots, Spring or lubricant meeting requirements Weatherstrip Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM
Anchor and of NLGI Grade 2, Category LB or Conditioning Part No. 12345579 or equivalent).
Release Pawl GC-LB. Weatherstrip Multi-purpose lubricant,
Hood and Door Multi-purpose lubricant, Squeaks Superlube@(GM Part
Hinges Superlube@(GM Part , No. I 234624 1 or equivalent).
No. 12346241 or equivalent). Gas Line Gas Line De-Icer (GM Part
No. 1051516).

See “Replacement Parts” in the Index for recommended

replacement filters, valves and spark plugs.

7-50
Part E: Maintenance Record Any additional information from “Owner Checks and
Services’’ or “Periodic Maintenance” can be added on
After the scheduled services are performed,record the the following record pages. Also, you should retain all
date, odometer reading and who performed the service maintenance receipts. Your owner information portfolio
in the boxes provided after the maintenance interval. is a convenient place to storethem.

Maintenance Record
ODOMETER
DATE READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED

_- _ - -

7-51
 Maintenance Record
ODOMETER
DATE READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED

7-52
 Maintenance Record
ODOMETER
DATE READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED

7-53
 Maintenance Record
~ ~ ~ ~ ~~~ ~~~~~~~~~

ODOMETER
SERVICED
READING BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED

7-54
 Section 8 Customer Assistance Information

Here you will find out how to contact Chevroletif Customer Satisfaction Procedure
you need assistance. This section also tells you how
to obtain service publicationsand how to report any
safety defects.
This section includes informationon:
0 The Customer Satisfaction Procedure
0 Customer Assistancefor Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
0 Roadside Assistance
0 Courtesy Transportation
0 BBB Auto Line -- Alternative Dispute
Resolution Program
0 Reporting Safety Defects c

r-
0 Service and Owner Publications
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your For help outside of the United States and Canada, call
dealer and Chevrolet. Normally, any concern you may the following numbers as appropriate:
have with your vehicle can be handled by your selling or 0 In Mexico: (525) 625-3256
servicing dealer. Your dealer has the facility, trained
technicians, special tools and up-to-date information to 0 In Puerto Rico: 1-800-496-9992 (English) or
promptly address any issue which may arise. Chevrolet 1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
has empowered its dealers to make decisions and repair 0 In the U.S. Virgin Islands: 1-800-496-9994
vehicles, and they are eager toresolve your concern to
your complete satisfaction. If your concern has not been 0 In the Dominican Republic: 1-800-75 1-4 135
resolved to your satisfaction, take the .following steps: (English) or 1-800-75 1-4 136 (Spanish)
STEP ONE -- Discuss your concern with a member 0 In the Bahamas: 1-800-389-0009
of dealer management. Normally, concerns can 0 In Bermuda, Barbados, Antigua and the British
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has Virgin Islands: 1-800-534-0 122
already been reviewed with the Sales, Service orParts
Manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the 0 In all other Caribbean countries: 1-809-763- 13 15
General Manager. 0 In other overseas locations, call GM North American
STEP TWO -- If after contacting a member of Export Sales in Canada at: 1-905-644-4 1 12.
dealership management, it appears your concern
cannot be resolvedby the dealership without further
help, contact the Chevrolet Customer Assistance
Center by calling 1-800-222-1020. I n Canada,
contact GM of Canada Customer Assistance Center
in Oshawa by calling 1-800-263-3777 (English)
o r 1-800-263-7854 (French).

8-2
For prompt assistance, please have the following Refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance
information available to give the Customer Information booklet for addresses of Canadian and
Assistance Representative: GM Overseas offices.
0 Your name, address, home and business When contacting Chevrolet,please remember that
telephone numbers your concern will likely be resolved in the dealership,
using the dealer's facilities, equipment and personnel.
Vehicle Identification Number (This is available
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if
from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at
you have a concern.
the top left of the instrument panel and visible
through the windshield.) Customer Assistancefor Text
0 Dealership name and location Telephone (TTY) Users
0 Vehicle delivery date and present mileage To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
Nature of concern speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer
We encourage you to call us so we can give your inquiry Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate with
prompt attention. However, if you wish to write Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV. (TTY users in
Chevrolet, write to: Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 7047
Troy, MI 48007-7047

8-3
Chevrolet Roadside Assistance Program Roadside Assistance is available 24 hours a day,
365 days a year, by calling 1-800-CHEV-USA
( I -800-243-8872). This toll-free number will provide
you over-the-phone roadside assistance with minor
mechanical problems. If your problem cannot be
resolved over the phone, our advisors have access to a
nationwide network of dealer recommended service
providers. Roadside membership is free, however some
services may incur costs.
Roadside offers two levels of service to the customer,
Basic Cure and Courtesy" Cure:
Toll-free number, 1-800-CHEV-USA
Free towing for warranty repairs
Basic over-the-phone technical advice
Available dealer services at reasonable costs (ie.,
wrecker services, locksmithkey service,glass
repair, etc .)
To enhance Chevrolet's strong commitment to customer
satisfaction, Chevrolet is excited to announce the ROADSIDE Courtesy TM Cure PROVIDES:
establishment of the Chevrolet/Geo Roadside Assistance Roadside BLES~C
Care services (as outlined above)
Center. As the owner of a 1996 Chevrolet/Geo, Plus:
membership in Roadside Assistance is free.
0 FREE Non-Warranty Towing (to the closest dealer
from a legal roadway)

8-4
0 FREE Locksmith/Key Service (when keys are lost For complete program details, see your Chevrolet/Geo
on the road or locked inside) dealer to obtain a Roadside Assistance Center brochure.
0 FREE Flat Tire Service (spare installed on the road) The Roadside Assistance Center uses companies that
will provide you with quality and priority service. When
0 FREE Jump Start (at home or on the road)
roadside services are required, our advisors will explain
0 FREE Fuel Delivery ($5 of fuel delivered on any payment obligations that may be incurred for
the road) utilizing outside services.
Chevrolet/Geo offers Courtesy Transportation for For prompt assistance when calling, please have the
customers needing warranty service. Courtesy following availableto give to the advisor:
Transportation will be offered in conjunction with
0 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
the coverage provided by the Bumper to Bumper
New Vehicle Limited Warranty to eligible purchasers 0 License plate number
of 1996 Chevrolet/Geo passenger carand light duty 0 Vehicle color
trucks. (Please seeyour selling dealer fordetails.)
Vehicle location
Note: Courtesy Care is available to Retail and Retail Lease
Customers operating 1996 and newer ChevroletlGeo 0 Telephone number where you can be reached
vehicles for a period of 36 months/36,000 miles, Vehicle mileage
whichever occurs first.All Courtesy Care services
must be pre-arranged by Chevrolet Roadsideor dealer 0 Description of problem
Service Management. Please refer to the Roadside Assistance brochure
Basic Care and Courtesy Care are not part of or inside your owner information portfolio for full
included in the coverage provided by the New Vehicle program details.
Limited Warranty. Chevrolet reserves theright to
modify or discontinueBasic Cure and Courtesy Care
at any time.
Canadian Roadside Assistance 0 Up to $10 daily fuel allowancefor rides provided by
another person (i.e., friend, neighbor, etc.) in lieu of
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive rental for any overnight warranty repair up to five days.
Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere
Note: All Courtesy Transportation arrangements will
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
be administered by your Chevrolet/Geo dealer
separate brochure provided by the dealer or call
service management. Claim amounts should reflect
1-800-268-6800 for emergency services.
all actual costs.
Courtesy Transportation 0 Chevrolet/Geo Courtesy Transportation is not part

Chevrolet/Geo offers Courtesy Transportation for

of the Bumper to Bumper New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Chevrolet/Geo reserves the right to make
customers needing warranty service. Courtesy
any changes or discontinue Courtesy Transportation
Transportation will be offered in conjunction with the at any time without notification.
coverage provided by the Bumper to Bumper New
0 For additional program details, contact your
Vehicle Limited Warranty to retail purchasers of
1996 Chevrolet/Geo passenger cars and light duty Chevrolet/Geo dealer.
trucks (please seeyour selling dealer for details). In Canada, please consult your GM dealer for
Courtesy Transportation includes: information on Courtesy Transportation.
Some state insurance regulations make it impractical to
0 One way shuttle ride for any warranty repair
rent vehicles to people under 2 1 years of age. If you are
completed during the same day. under 2 1 and have difficulty renting a vehicle, Chevrolet
0 Up to $30 maximum daily vehicle rental allowance will reimburse LIPt o $30/day for documented
for any overnight warranty repair up to fivedays, OR transportation you receive.
0 Up to $30 maximum daily cab, bus or other For warranty repairs during the Complete Vehicle
transportation allowance in lieu of rental for any Coverage period in the New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
overnight warranty repair up to five days, OR interim transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Proyam. Please consult your
dealer for details. The Roadside Assistance program is
available only in the United States and Canada.

8-6
GM Participation inBBB AUTO BBB AUTO LINE is an out-of-court program
administered by the Better Business Bureau system to
LINE -- Alternative Dispute settle disputes between customers and automobile
Resolution Program* manufacturers. This program is available freeof charge
to customers who currently own or lease a GM vehicle.
*This program may not be available in all states,
depending on state law. Canadian owners refer to your If you are not satisfied after following the Customer
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet. Satisfaction Procedure,you may contact the BBB using
General Motors reserves the right to change eligibility the toll-free telephone number, or write them at the
limitations and/orto discontinue its participation in following address:
this program. BBB AUTO LINE
Both Chevrolet and your Chevrolet dealer are committed Council of Better Business Bureaus
to making sure you are completely satisfied with your new 4200 Wilson Boulevard
vehicle. Our experience has shown that,if a situation Suite 800
arises where you feel your concern has not been Arlington, VA 22203
adequately addressed, theCustomer Satisfaction Procedure Telephone: 1-800-955-5 100
described earlier in this section is very successful.
There may be instances where an impartial third party
can assist in arriving at a solution to a disagreement
regarding vehicle repairs or interpretation of the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. To assist in resolving these
disagreements, Chevroletvoluntarily participates in
BBB AUTO LINE.

8-7
I
To file a claim, you will be asked to provide your name REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
and address, your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
and a statement of the nature of your complaint. TO THE UNITED STATES
Eligibility is limited by vehicle age and mileage, and GOVERNMENT
' other factors. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
We prefer you utilize the Customer Satisfaction cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, you should
Procedure before you resort to AUTO LINE, but you immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
may contact the BBB at any time. The BBB will attempt Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to
to resolve the complaint serving asan intermediary notifying General Motors.
between you and Chevrolet. If this mediation is If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
unsuccessful, an informal hearing will be scheduled investigation, and if it findsthat a safety defect exists in
where eligible customers may present their case toan a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
impartial third-party arbitrator. campaign. However, NHTSA cannot-become involved
The arbitrator will make.a decisionwhich you may in individual problems ,betweenyou, your dealer or
accept or reject. If you accept the decision, GM will be General Motors.
bound by that decision. The entire disputeresolution To contact NHTSA, you mayeither callthe Auto Safety
procedure should ordinarily take about 40 days from the Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the
time you file a claim until a decision is made. Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
Some statelaws may require you to use this program NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
before filing a claim with a state-run arbitration program Washington, D.C. 20590
or in the courts. For further information, contact the
BBB at 1-800-955-5 100 or the Chevrolet Customer You can also obtain other information about motor
Assistance Center at 1-800-222- 1020. vehicle safety from the Hotline.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO Service and Owner Publications
THE CANADIAN GOVERNMENT
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediatelynotify
Transport Canada,in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
Transport Canada
Box 8880
Ottawa, Ontario K1G 352
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO GENERAL MOTORS
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada)
in a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify
us. Please call us at 1-800-222-1020 or write:
Service manuals, service bulletins, owner’s manuals and
Lnevrolet Motor Division other serviceliterature are available for purchase for all
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center current and many past model General Motors vehicles.
P.O. Box 7047
Troy, Michigan 48007-7047 Toll-free telephone numbers for ordering information:
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English) United States . . . . . . . 1-800-55 1-4 123
or 1-800-263-7854 (French).Or, write:
Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-800-668-5539
General Motorsof Canada Limited
Customer Assistance Center
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, OntarioLl H 8P7

8-9
Service Manuals number of vehicles. Some will describe inexpensive
service; otherswill describe expensiveservice. Some
Service manuals contain diagnostic and repair will advise of new or unexpected conditions, and others
information for all chassis and body systems. They may help avoid future costly repairs. Service bulletins
may be useful for owners who wish to get a greater are meant for qualified technicians. In some cases
understanding of their vehicle. They are also useful for bulletins refer to service manuals, specialized tools,
owners with the appropriate skill level or training who equipment and safety procedures necessary to service
wish to perform “do-it-yourself” service. These are the vehicle. Since these bulletins are issued throughout
authentic General Motors service manuals meant for the model year and beyond, an index is required and
professional, qualified technicians. published quarterly to help identify specific bulletins.
Service Bulletins Subscriptions are available. You can order an index at
the toll-free numbers listed previously, or ask a GM
Service bulletins covering various subjects are regularly dealer to see an index or individual bulletin.
sent to all General Motors dealerships. GM monitors
product performance in the field. When service methods Owner Publications
are found which promote better service on GM vehicles, Owner’s manuals, warranty folders and various owner
bulletins are created to help the technician perform assistance booklets provide owners with general
better service. Service bulletins may involve any operation and maintenance information.

8-10
 Section 9 Index

Accessory Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53 Appearancecare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58

AirBag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21 Appearance Care Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66
Adding Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26 Arbitration Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
How Does it Restrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24 Armrest Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
How it Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 Audio Equipment, Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.22,2.59 Audiosystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
What Makes it M a t e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
What Will You See After it Inflates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
When Should it Inflate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 Park Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
Aircleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16 Startin8 Your Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Air Cleaner Filter Restriction Indicator Check . . . . . . . . 7-43 Operatlon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Axle, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Air Conditioning Refrigerants ..................... 6-76 Axle, Locking Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Alignment and Balance. Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55 Axle, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Aluminum Wheels. Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
Anti-Lock Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Replacement. Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Brake System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62, 4-6 Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2. 5-4
BBB Auto Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Better Business Bureau Mediation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

9-1
Brake Chains.Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Adjustment .................................. 6-36 Chains.Tire ................................... 6-57
Fluid ....................................... 6-33 Changing a Flat Tire ............................. 5-21
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33 Charging SystemLight .......................... 2-59
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25 Check Gages Light ............................... 2-67
PedalTravel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36 Checking Your Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52
Replacing System Parts ........................ 6-36 Chemical Paint Spotting .......................... 6-65
System Warning Light ......................... 2-61 ChildRestraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55 Securing in a Rear Outside Seat Position . . . . . . 1-39. 1-41
Transmission Shift Interlock Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44 Securing in the Center Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44
Wear ....................................... 6-35 Securing in the Right Front Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . 1-46
Brakes, Anti-Lock ............................... 4-6 TopStrap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 WheretoPut ................................ 1-38
Braking in Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 Cigarette Lighter ............................... 2-52
Break-in, NewVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Circuit Breakers and Fuses ....................... 6-69
BTSI Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44 Cleaner. Air .................................... 6-16
BulbReplacement .............................. 6-37 Cleaning
Aluminum Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
Canadian RoadsideAssistance .................... 8-6 Fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61
Capacities and Specifications ...................... 6-74 Inside of Your Vehicle ......................... 6-58
Carbon Monoxide ......................... 2.30.4.41 instrument Panel ............................. 6-61
CargoLamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43 Leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61
Cassette Deck Service ........................... 7-42 Outside of Your Vehicle ........................ 6-62
Cassette Tape Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9. 3- 1 1 SpecialProblems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60
Cassette Tape Player Care ........................ 3-24 Stains ...................................... 6-60
Cassette/Compact Disc Storage .................... 2-50 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
Center Overhead Console ........................ 2-46 Vinyl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60
Center Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28 Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42 Windshield and Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62
CertificationlTire Label .......................... 4-42 Climate Control System ....................... 3-1. 3-2

9-2
t
Clock. Setting the ................................. 3-7 DomeLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Clutch Fluid. Hydraulic .......................... 6-23 Door
Comfort Controls ................................. 3-1 Locks ....................................... 2-4.
Compact Disc Care . . . . i ......................... 3-24 Storagepocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Compact Disc Player ....................... 3-1 5. 3-17 Third .........................................
. 2-3
Compass. Rearview Mirror with .................... 2-44 Downshifting .................................. 2-19
Consble;Storage ................................. 2-49 Driver Position ................................. 1- 13.
Control of a Vehicle ............................... 4-5 Driving
Convex Outside Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46 City . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33 .

Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26 Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Heater.Engine ............................... 2-12 Drunken .................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 -2.
Recovery Tank ............................... 5-14 Freeway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34-
CoolingSystem ................................ 5- 12 Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . 4-13
Courtesy Transportation ........................... 8-6 InaBlizzard ................................. 4-40.
Cruise Control ............................. : . . . 2-36 In the Rain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49 Night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28 .
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone Users. . . . . . . . . 8-3 Off-Road .................................... 4-13
Customer Assistance Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 1 OnCurves ................................... 4-8
Customer Satisfaction Procedure .................... 8- 1 On Grades While Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
On Hill and Mountain Roads .................... 4-36
On Snow and Ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Damage, Finish ............................... 6-64 Throughwater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 32
Damage. Sheet Metal ............................. 6-64 WetRoads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Daytime Running Lamps ......................... 2-40 Winter ....................................... 4-38
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67 With a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
DeadBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 DrunkenDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Defects, ReportingSafety ......................... 8-8
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 1
'Defogger, RearWindow .......................... 3-6 E a s y Entry Seat ................................ 1-6
Defoggng and Defrosting ......................... 3-5 Electrica1.Equipment.Adding . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 12. 3.23. 6-68
Dolby B NoiseReduction ........................ 3-14 Electrical. System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68
Electrochromic Daymight Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . 2-44

. 9-3
L ...........

' 7

Engine .. i .................................6.8. 6. 10 Finish Damage.................................... 6-64

Coolant ..................................... I6-26 Flashers. Hazard Warning .......................... 5-1
C,oolant Heater ....... ;....................... 2- 12 Flat Tire, Changing .............................. 5-21 .
.. Coolant LevelCheck ...........................7-42 Fluid Capacities ......................... ,. . . . . . . 6-76
.. CoolantTemperatureGage .......................2-62 Fluids and Lubricants ............................. 7-48
Cooling System Capacity ........................6-76 Fog Lamps ...................................; .. 2-41
Exhaust ......................................2-30 Foreign Countries. Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 .
FuseBlocks .............. ............... 6-69. 6-71 Four-wheel Drive ......................... 2-21. 6-25
Identification ................................. Manual Language 6-67 French ............................ 11..
Oil Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-42 . Front Axle. ......................................6-26
. Overheating ....................... ;........... 5-10 Front Axle Locking Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21
. Running 'While Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . .:........... 2-30 FrontTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9
Specifications . i ...............................6-74 Front Turn Signal Lamp Bulb Replacement . . . . . 6-40. 6-41
Starting Your ........................ : ........2-1 1 Fuel ............................................ 6-2
Underhood FuseRelay Center ................... 4-71
.
Engine Oil .............. .......................6-12
Adding ......................................6- 13
Filling Your Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4
Gage ........................................2-68
In Foreign Countries ............................6-4
Additives ....................................6- 15 TankCapacity .......... : .................... 6-76
Checking. ..................................... 6- 12 Fuses and Circuit Breakers ....................... 6-69
Pressure Gage . . . .:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-65 Fusible Links .....................................6-.69
Used. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
.
Whentochange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-15
Exhaust. Engine ................................. 2-30 Gages
Engine Coolant Temperature.................... 2-62
Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . .................... 2-65
Fabric Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-59 Fuel .................... .................... 2-68
Fan Control. Climate Control System .............3.1. 3.2 Speedometer.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .................... . 2-57
Fender Marker Lamp Bulb Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .................... 2-57
Filling Your Tank ................................ 6-4 Voltmeter ...................................
...
2-6U
Filter. Air .....................................(i-16 Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Finish Care ..................................... 6-63 GAWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42

9-4
Gear Positions. Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 13 Ignition Positims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Gear Positions. Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 2- 17. 2- 18 IlluminatedEntry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
GloveBox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46 Inflation. Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42 Inside Day/Night Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ...................... 4-42.. Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
Guide Franpis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Brakesystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42 DriveAxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
ExhaustSystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
Radiator and Heater- Hose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5- 1 Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39 Throttle Linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.38.6.39 Transfer Case (Four-wheel Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
High/LowBeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34 Instrumentpanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68 Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-69
Hearing Impaired. Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 IntensityControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Interior Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
High-Beam Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Tire ........
Hitches. Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
4-36 JJump
ack. ....................................
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-22
5-2
Hood
Checking Things Under . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 K e y Lock Cylinders Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32 Key Release Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Hydraulic Clutch Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23 KeylessEntrySystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Hydroplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

9-5
Labels KeyLock Cylinders Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
Certification ................................. 4-42 PowerDoor .................................. 2-5
CertificatiodTire ............................. 4-42 Steering Column Lock Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
Service Parts Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-67 Lubricants and Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-67 Lubrication Service. Body ........................ 7-43
Lamps ........................................ 2-39 LumbarControls ................................ 1-2
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Dome ...................................... 2-42
Interior ..................................... 2-42 Maintenance. Normal Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75
OnReminder ................................ 2-39 MaintenanceRecord ............................ 7-51
UnderhoodReel .............................. 2-41 Maintenance Schedule ............................. 7-1
Latches. Seatback ................................ 1-5 Long Trip/Highway Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Leaving Your Vehicle ............................. 2-5 Long Trip/Highway Intervals ..................... 7-5
Leaving.Your Vehicle with the Engine Running . . . . . . . 2-28 Owner Checks and Services ..................... 7-42
Lighter ....................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52 Periodic Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
Lights Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
Air Bag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.22. 2.59 Scheduled Maintenance Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.62.4.6 Short Trip/City Definition ....................... 7-4
Brake System Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61 Short TripKity Intervals ......................... 7-4
ChargingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59 Maintenance. Underbody ......................... 6-65
CheckGages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67 Maintenance When Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67 MalfunctionIndicatorLamp ...................... 2-63
Safety Belt Reminder ...................... 1.9. 2.58 ManualFrontSeat ............................... 1-1
Service Engine Soon .......................... 2-63 ManualMirror ................................. 2-45
Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.20.2.66 Manual Transmission
Loading Information. Truck-Camper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44 Check ...................................... 7-43
Loading YourVehicle ........................... 4-42 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
LockoutSwitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32 Shifting ................................ 2-17. 2-18
Locks Starting Your Engine .......................... 2-11
Cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43 Manual Windows ............................... 2-31
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 MemoPadHolder .............................. 2-49
Methanol ...................................... 6-3

9-6
Mirrors ....................................... 2-43 Brake Mechanism Check ....................... 7-45
Convex Outside .............................. 2-46 Lots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Electrochromic Daymight Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44 Over Things That Burn ........................ 2-29
Inside Daymight Rearview ..................... 2-43 With a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45 YourVehicle. Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Power Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45 PassengerPosition .............................. 1-28
MMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
ModelReference ................................. vi Periodic Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
Mountain Roads ................................. 4-36 Power
Accessory Outlet ............................. 2-53
DoorLocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
N e w Vehicle Break-In ........................... 2-8 Driver’sSeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Nightvision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29 Option Fuses ................................ 6-68
Noise Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 1 I RemoteControlMirror ........................ 2-45
Steering ..................................... 4-8
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57 Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Odometer. Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57 Take-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
Off-Road Driving .............................. 4- 13 Winches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
Off-Road Recovery ............................. 4- I O Windows ................................... 2-31
Oil. Engine .................................... 6-12 Pregnancy. Use of Safety Belts .................... 1-27
Opener. Garage Door ............................ 2-46 Problems on the Road ............................ 5-1
Overheating Engine ............................. 5- 10 PTO ......................................... 4-60
Owner Checks and Services ....................... 7-42 Publications. Service and Owner .................... 8-9
Owner Publications. Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Radiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
P a i n t Spotting. Chemical ........................ 6-65 Radiator Pressure Cap ........................... 6-30
Park. Shifting Into .............................. 2-26 Radio Reception ................................ 3-23
Parking Radios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
AtNight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Rain. Driving In ................................ 4-30
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25 ReadingLamps ................................ 2-42

9-7
Rear Safety Belt Extender ............................ 1-52
Axle ....................................... 6-24 SafetyBelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Outside Seat Position ..................... 1.30. 1-33 Adults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
SeatPassengers .............................. 1-30 Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Center Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
WindowDefogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
RearSeat .................................. 1-7, 1-8 Driver Position ............................... 1 .13
Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43 Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52
Electrochromic Day/Night ...................... 2-44 How to Wear Properly ......................... 1 .13
Inside Daymight ............................. 2-43 IncorrectUsage .................... 1-16. 1-50. 1-51
RecliningSeatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 LapBelt .................................... 1-28
Recovery Hooks ................................ 5-33 Lap-Shoulder ...................... 1-13. 1.31. 1-34
Recovery Tank, Coolant .......................... 5- 14 LargerChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49
Refrigerants. Air Conditioning .................... 6-76 Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Replacement Questions and Answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 .12
Bulbs ................................. 6-37, 6-73 Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions . . . . . . . 1.30. 1-33
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75 Rear Seat Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55 ReminderLight .......................... 1.9. 2.58
Replacing Safety Belts ........................... 1-53 Replacing After a Crash ........................ 1-53
Reporting Safety Defects .......................... 8-8 Right Front Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Restraints Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 .15
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52 Smaller Children and Babies .................... 1-36
Child ....................................... 1-38 Use During Pregnancy ......................... 1-27
Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 WhyTheyWork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Replacing Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-53 Safety Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Systemcheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43 Safety Defects. Reporting ......................... 8-8
...
Right Front Passenger Position .................... 1-28 Safety Warnings and Symbols ....................... 111
Roadside Assistance .............................. 8-4 Scheduled Maintenance Services .................... 7-3
Roadside Assistance, Canadian ..................... 8-6
RockingYourVehicle ........................... 5-33
Roof Marker Lamp Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
Rotation. Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50

9-8
Seatback. Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Skidding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Seatbacks. Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Sound Equipment. Adding ........................ 3-23
Seats Specifications and Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-74
EasyEntry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Specifications.Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-74
ManualFront . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Speech Impaired. Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Power Driver’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
Power Lumbar Control.......................... 1-2 Stains. Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7, 1-8 Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- 1 Starting Your Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Seat Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- 1 Steam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Securing a Child Restraint . . . . . . . 1-39. 1-41.1-44.1-46 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 ColumnLockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
Bulletins. Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 In Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
EngineSoonLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Manuals, Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Parts Identitication Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-67 Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Publications, Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 Step-BumperPad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
Work. Doing Your Own . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 1 StorageAreas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Service and Appearance Care ...................... 6- I Storage, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Service and Owner Publications .................... 8-9 Storage, Underhood ............................. 2-51
Service Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26 Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Sheet Metal Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64 Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Shift Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 13. 2- 17. 2- I8 Sunvisors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Shift Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20, 2-66 Supplemental Intlatable Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Shiftspeeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Symbols, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
Shifting Into Park (P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Shifting, ManualTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 17, 2- 18
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 15 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
Sidemarker Lamp Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43 Tailgate Marker Lamp Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
SignalingTurns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34 Tailgate Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
SIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21 Taillamp Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.45.6.46

9-9
Tape Player Care ............................... 3-24 Torque. Wheel Nut ......................... 5.28.6.75
Temperature Control. Climate Control System . . . . . 3.1.3.3 Towing a Trailer ................................ 4-46
Theft .......................................... 2-7 Towing Your Vehicle ............................. 5-7
Theft-Deterrent Feature .......................... 3-2 1 Trailer
THEFTLOCK" ................................ 3-21 Brakes ..................................... 4-55
Thermostat .................................... 6-30 Driving on Grades ............................ 4-57
ThirdDoor ..................................... 2-3 Drivingwith ................................. 4-55
TiltSteeringWheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33 Hitches ..................................... 4-54
Time. Setting the ................................ 3-7 Maintenance When Towing ..................... 4-59
Tirechains .................................... 6-57 Parking on Hills .............................. 4-58
TireLoading ................................... 4-42 Safety Chains ................................ 4-55
Tires ......................................... 6-48 Tongueweight ............................... 4-53
Alignment and Balance ........................ 6-55 Total Weight on Tires .......................... 4-54
BuyingNew ................................. 6-53 Towing ..................................... 4-46
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57 Turnsignals ................................. 4-57
ChangingaFlat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Cleaning .................................... 6-64 Wiring Harness ............................... 4-59
Inflation .................................... 6-49 Transfer Case. Electronic ......................... 2-23
Inflation Check ............................... 7-42 Transfer Case Lubricant .......................... 6-25
Inspection and Rotation ........................ 6-50 Transfer Case. Manual ........................... 2-21
Loading ..................................... 4-42 Transmission Fluid
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Temperature ................................. 6-55 Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Traction .................................... 6-54 Transmitters. Keyless Entry ........................ 2-5
Treadwear ................................... 6-54 Transportation.Courtesy .......................... 8-6
Uniform Quality Grading ....................... 6-54 TripOdometer ................................. 2-57
Wear Indicators .............................. 6-52 TTYUsers ..................................... 8-3
Wheel Replacement ........................... 6-55 Turn Signal and Lane Change Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
When It's Time for New ....................... 6-52 Turn SignalMultifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
TopStrap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39 Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
TorqueLock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28

9-10
Underbody Maintenance ........................ 6-65 Wheel
Underhood Fuse/Relay Center ..................... 6-7 I Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
Underhood Reel Lamp ........................... 2-41 Nut Torque ............................. 5.28. 6.75
Underhood Storage ............................. 2-5 1 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
Wrench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Vehicle Lockout Switch .............................. 2-32
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
DamageWarnings .............................. iv Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Identification Number ......................... 6-67 Sliding Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42 Swing-Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37 Windshield Washer' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Ventilation System ............................... 3-4 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36. 6-31
Visors.Sun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53 Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
BladeReplacement ...................... 6-47, 6-75
w a r n i n g Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68
Warning Lights. Gages and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58 Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Washer Fluid. Windshield ........................ 6-3 1 Wiring,Headlamp .............................. 6-68
WashingYourVehicle ........................... 6-62 Wrench, Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Weatherstrips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62

9-11
NOTES

9-12
c